Powerscan™ 9500 Family Industrial Corded Handheld Area Imager Bar Code Reader Powerscan PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500

PowerScan™ 9500 Family Industrial Corded Handheld Area Imager Bar Code Reader PowerScan PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500

Product Reference Guide Datalogic ADC, Inc. 959 Terry Street | Eugene | OR 97402 | USA Telephone: (1) 541-683-5700 | Fax: (1) 541-345-7140

An Unpublished Work - All rights reserved. No part of the contents of this documentation or the procedures described therein may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written permission of Datalogic ADC, Inc. or its subsidiaries or affiliates ("Datalogic" or “Datalogic ADC”). Owners of Datalogic products are hereby granted a non- exclusive, revocable license to reproduce and transmit this documentation for the purchaser's own internal business purposes. Purchaser shall not remove or alter any proprietary notices, including copyright notices, contained in this documentation and shall ensure that all notices appear on any reproductions of the documentation. Should future revisions of this manual be published, you can acquire printed versions by con- tacting your Datalogic representative. Electronic versions may either be downloadable from the Datalogic website (www.datalogic.com) or provided on appropriate media. If you visit our website and would like to make comments or suggestions about this or other Datalogic publications, please let us know via the "Contact Datalogic" page.

Disclaimer Datalogic has taken reasonable measures to provide information in this manual that is complete and accurate, however, Datalogic reserves the right to change any specification at any time without prior notice. Datalogic and the Datalogic logo are registered trademarks of Datalogic S.p.A. in many coun- tries, including the U.S.A. and the E.U. All other brand and product names may be trademarks of their respective owners.

Patents

See www.patents.datalogic.com for patent list. Table of Contents

INTRODUCTION...... 1 About this Manual ...... 1 Overview ...... 1 Manual Conventions ...... 2 References ...... 2 Technical Support ...... 2 Datalogic Website Support ...... 2 Reseller Technical Support ...... 2 Telephone Technical Support ...... 2 About the Reader ...... 3 PM8500 Compatible Mode: ...... 3 The BC9xx0™ Base Station/Charger ...... 4 Battery Safety ...... 5 Programming the Reader ...... 6 Configuration Methods ...... 6 SETUP...... 7 Unpacking ...... 7 Setting Up the Reader ...... 7 Connecting the Cable (Corded versions) ...... 8 Configuring the Base Station ...... 9 Mounting the BC9xx0 Cradle ...... 9 Mounting Brackets ...... 9 Permanent Mounting ...... 10 Mounting for Portable Use ...... 11 System Connections ...... 12 Connecting and Disconnecting the Interface Cable ...... 13 BC9xx0 Configuration ...... 14 Interface Selection ...... 14 Setting the Interface ...... 14 Customizing Configuration Settings ...... 17 Configure Interface Settings ...... 17 Global Interface Features ...... 17 Configuring Other Features ...... 17 Software Version Transmission ...... 17 Resetting the Product Configuration to Defaults ...... 18 Set Date and Time ...... 18 Linking the Reader ...... 19 Link Datalogic RF Devices to Base ...... 19 Linking to a Bluetooth Adapter in Serial Port Profile (Slave) Mode ...... 19 Linking to a Bluetooth Adapter in Serial Port Profile (Master) Mode ...... 19 Linking to a Bluetooth Adapter in HID mode ...... 20 Power Off ...... 20 CONFIGURATION USING BAR CODES ...... 21 Configuration Parameters ...... 21 GLOBAL INTERFACE FEATURES 23 Host Commands — Obey/Ignore ...... 23 USB Suspend Mode ...... 23 RS-232 Only Interface25 Baud Rate ...... 26 Data Bits ...... 27 Stop Bits ...... 27 Parity ...... 28 Handshaking Control ...... 29 RS-232/USB-Com Interfaces30 Intercharacter Delay ...... 31 Beep On ASCII BEL ...... 31

Product Reference Guide i Contents

Beep On Not on File ...... 32 ACK NAK Options ...... 32 ACK Character ...... 33 NAK Character ...... 33 ACK NAK Timeout Value ...... 34 ACK NAK Retry Count ...... 34 ACK NAK Error Handling ...... 35 Indicate Transmission Failure ...... 35 Disable Character ...... 36 Enable Character ...... 36 Keyboard EMULATION Settings ...... 37 Country Mode ...... 38 Send Control Characters ...... 41 Wedge Quiet Interval ...... 42 Intercode Delay ...... 42 Caps Lock State ...... 43 Numlock ...... 43 USB Keyboard Speed ...... 44 USB Keyboard Numeric Keypad ...... 45 USB-OEM Interface ...... 47 USB-OEM Device Usage ...... 48 Interface Options ...... 48 Data Format ...... 49 Global Prefix/Suffix (Header/Terminator) ...... 50 Global AIM ID ...... 51 Set AIM ID Individually for GS1-128 ...... 54 Label ID ...... 55 Label ID: Pre-Loaded Sets ...... 55 Individually Set Label ID ...... 56 Label ID Control ...... 56 Label ID Symbology Selection − 1D Symbologies ...... 57 Advanced Formatting: User Label Edit ...... 61 Case Conversion ...... 61 Character Conversion ...... 61 Reading Parameters ...... 63 Double Read Timeout ...... 64 LED AND BEEPER INDICATORS ...... 66 Power On Alert ...... 66 Good Read: When to Indicate ...... 66 Good Read Beep Type ...... 67 Good Read Beep Frequency ...... 67 Good Read Beep Length ...... 68 Good Read Beep Volume ...... 69 Good Read LED Duration ...... 70 SCANNING FEATURES ...... 71 Scan Mode ...... 71 Stand Mode Indication ...... 72 Pick Mode ...... 72 Stand Mode Sensitivity ...... 73 Stand Mode Illumination Off Time ...... 73 Scanning Active Time ...... 74 Stand Illumination Control ...... 74 Flash On Time ...... 75 Flash Off Time ...... 75 Aiming Pointer ...... 76 Aiming Duration Timer ...... 76 Green Spot Duration ...... 77 Partial Label Reading Control ...... 77 Decode Negative Image ...... 78 Image Capture ...... 78 MULTIPLE LABEL READING ...... 79 Multiple Labels per Frame ...... 79 Multiple Labels Ordering by Code Symbology ...... 80 Multiple Labels Ordering by Code Length ...... 80 1D Symbologies ...... 81 DISABLE ALL SYMBOLOGIES ...... 82 ii PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Contents

CODE EAN/UPC ...... 83 Coupon Control ...... 83 UPC-A ...... 84 UPC-A Enable/Disable ...... 84 UPC-A Check Character Transmission ...... 84 Expand UPC-A to EAN-13 ...... 85 UPC-A Number System Character Transmission ...... 85 UPC-A 2D Component ...... 86 UPC-E ...... 86 UPC-E Enable/Disable ...... 86 UPC-E Check Character Transmission ...... 87 UPC-E 2D Component ...... 87 Expand UPC-E to EAN-13 ...... 88 Expand UPC-E to UPC-A ...... 88 UPC-E Number System Character Transmission ...... 89 GTIN FORMATTING ...... 89 EAN 13 (JAN 13) ...... 90 EAN 13 Enable/Disable ...... 90 EAN 13 Check Character Transmission ...... 90 EAN-13 Flag 1 Character ...... 91 EAN-13 ISBN Conversion ...... 91 EAN-13 2D Component ...... 92 ISSN ...... 92 ISSN Enable/Disable ...... 92 EAN 8 (JAN 8) ...... 93 EAN 8 Enable/Disable ...... 93 EAN 8 Check Character Transmission ...... 93 Expand EAN 8 to EAN 13 ...... 94 EAN 8 2D Component ...... 94 UPC/EAN GLOBAL SETTINGS ...... 95 UPC/EAN Price Weight Check ...... 95 UPC/EAN Quiet Zones ...... 96 ADD-ONS ...... 97 Optional Add-ons ...... 97 Optional Add-On Timer ...... 98 Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer ...... 100 CODE 39 ...... 103 Code 39 Enable/Disable ...... 103 Code 39 Check Character Calculation ...... 103 Code 39 Check Character Transmission ...... 104 Code 39 Start/Stop Character Transmission ...... 105 Code 39 Full ASCII ...... 105 Code 39 Quiet Zones ...... 106 Code 39 Length Control ...... 106 Code 39 Set Length 1 ...... 107 Code 39 Set Length 2 ...... 108 TRIOPTIC CODE ...... 109 Trioptic Code Enable/Disable ...... 109 CODE 32 (ITAL PHARMACEUTICAL CODE) ...... 109 Code 32 Enable/Disable ...... 109 Code 32 Feature Setting Exceptions ...... 109 Code 32 Check Character Transmission ...... 110 Code 32 Start/Stop Character Transmission ...... 110 CODE 39 CIP (FRENCH PHARMACEUTICAL) ...... 111 Code 39 CIP Enable/Disable ...... 111 CODE 39 DANISH PPT ...... 111 Code 39 Danish PPT Enable/Disable ...... 111 CODE 39 LAPOSTE ...... 112 Code 39 LaPoste Enable/Disable ...... 112 CODE 39 PZN ...... 112 Code 39 PZN Enable/Disable ...... 112 CODE 128 ...... 113 Code 128 Enable/Disable ...... 113 Expand Code 128 to Code 39 ...... 113 Code 128 Check Character Transmission ...... 114 Code 128 Function Character Transmission ...... 114 Code 128 Sub-Code Exchange Transmission ...... 115

Product Reference Guide iii Contents

Code 128 Quiet Zones ...... 115 Code 128 Length Control ...... 116 Code 128 Set Length 1 ...... 117 Code 128 Set Length 2 ...... 118 GS1-128 ...... 119 GS1-128 Enable ...... 119 GS1-128 2D Component ...... 119 CODE ISBT 128 ...... 120 ISBT 128 Concatenation ...... 120 ISBT 128 Force Concatenation ...... 120 ISBT 128 Concatenation Mode ...... 121 ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout ...... 122 ISBT 128 Advanced Concatenation Options ...... 122 INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5 (I 2 OF 5) ...... 123 I 2 of 5 Enable/Disable ...... 123 I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation ...... 124 I 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission ...... 125 I 2 of 5 Length Control ...... 125 I 2 of 5 Set Length 1 ...... 126 I 2 of 5 Set Length 2 ...... 127 INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5 CIP HR ...... 128 Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR Enable/Disable ...... 128 FOLLETT 2 OF 5 ...... 128 Follett 2 of 5 Enable/Disable ...... 128 STANDARD 2 OF 5 ...... 129 Standard 2 of 5 Enable/Disable ...... 129 Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation ...... 129 Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission ...... 130 Standard 2 of 5 Length Control ...... 130 Standard 2 of 5 Set Length 1 ...... 131 Standard 2 of 5 Set Length 2 ...... 132 INDUSTRIAL 2 OF 5 ...... 133 Industrial 2 of 5 Enable/Disable ...... 133 Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation ...... 133 Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission ...... 134 Industrial 2 of 5 Length Control ...... 134 Industrial 2 of 5 Set Length 1 ...... 135 Industrial 2 of 5 Set Length 2 ...... 136 CODE IATA ...... 137 IATA Enable/Disable ...... 137 IATA Check Character Transmission ...... 137 CODABAR ...... 138 Codabar Enable/Disable ...... 138 Codabar Check Character Calculation ...... 138 Codabar Check Character Transmission ...... 139 Codabar Start/Stop Character Transmission ...... 139 Codabar Start/Stop Character Set ...... 140 Codabar Start/Stop Character Match ...... 140 Codabar Quiet Zones ...... 141 Codabar Length Control ...... 141 Codabar Set Length 1 ...... 142 Codabar Set Length 2 ...... 143 ABC CODABAR ...... 144 ABC Codabar Enable/Disable ...... 144 ABC Codabar Concatenation Mode ...... 144 ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout ...... 145 ABC Codabar Force Concatenation ...... 146 CODE 11 ...... 147 Code 11 Enable/Disable ...... 147 Code 11 Check Character Calculation ...... 147 Code 11 Check Character Transmission ...... 148 Code 11 Length Control ...... 148 Code 11 Set Length 1 ...... 149 Code 11 Set Length 2 ...... 150 GS1 DATABAR™ OMNIDIRECTIONAL ...... 151 GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Enable/Disable ...... 151 GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional GS1-128 Emulation ...... 151 iv PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Contents

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional 2D Component ...... 152 GS1 DATABAR™ EXPANDED ...... 152 GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Enable/Disable ...... 152 GS1 DataBar™ Expanded GS1-128 Emulation ...... 153 GS1 DataBar™ Expanded 2D Component ...... 153 GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Length Control ...... 154 GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Set Length 1 ...... 155 GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Set Length 2 ...... 156 GS1 DATABAR™ LIMITED ...... 157 GS1 DataBar™ Limited Enable/Disable ...... 157 GS1 DataBar™ Limited GS1-128 Emulation ...... 157 GS1 DataBar™ Limited 2D Component ...... 158 CODE 93 ...... 158 Code 93 Enable/Disable ...... 158 Code 93 Check Character Calculation ...... 159 Code 93 Check Character Transmission ...... 159 Code 93 Length Control ...... 160 Code 93 Set Length 1 ...... 161 Code 93 Set Length 2 ...... 162 Code 93 Quiet Zones ...... 163 MSI ...... 163 MSI Enable/Disable ...... 163 MSI Check Character Calculation ...... 164 MSI Check Character Transmission ...... 164 MSI Length Control ...... 165 MSI Set Length 1 ...... 166 MSI Set Length 2 ...... 167 PLESSEY ...... 168 Plessey Enable/Disable ...... 168 Plessey Check Character Calculation ...... 168 Plessey Check Character Transmission ...... 169 Plessey Length Control ...... 169 Plessey Set Length 1 ...... 170 Plessey Set Length 2 ...... 171 2D Symbologies ...... 173 2D Global Features ...... 173 2D Maximum Decoding Time ...... 174 2D Structured Append ...... 175 2D Normal/Inverse Symbol Control ...... 175 AZTEC CODE ...... 176 Aztec Code Enable / Disable ...... 176 Aztec Code Length Control ...... 176 Aztec Code Set Length 1 ...... 177 Aztec Code Set Length 2 ...... 178 CHINA SENSIBLE CODE ...... 179 China Sensible Code Enable / Disable ...... 179 China Sensible Code Length Control ...... 179 China Sensible Code Set Length 1 ...... 180 China Sensible Code Set Length 2 ...... 181 DATA MATRIX ...... 182 Data Matrix Enable / Disable ...... 182 Data Matrix Square/Rectangular Style ...... 182 Data Matrix DPM Decoding Safety ...... 183 Data Matrix Length Control ...... 184 Data Matrix Set Length 1 ...... 184 Data Matrix Set Length 2 ...... 185 MAXICODE ...... 186 Maxicode Enable / Disable ...... 186 Maxicode Primary Message Transmission ...... 186 Maxicode Length Control ...... 187 Maxicode Set Length 1 ...... 187 Maxicode Set Length 2 ...... 188 PDF417 ...... 189 PDF417 Enable / Disable ...... 189 PDF417 Length Control ...... 189 PDF417 Set Length 1 ...... 190 PDF417 Set Length 2 ...... 191

Product Reference Guide v Contents

MICRO PDF417 ...... 192 Micro PDF417 Enable / Disable ...... 192 Micro PDF417 Code 128 GS1-128 Emulation ...... 192 Micro PDF417 Length Control ...... 193 Micro PDF417 Set Length 1 ...... 193 Micro PDF417 Set Length 2 ...... 194 QR CODE ...... 195 QR Code Enable / Disable ...... 195 QR Code Length Control ...... 195 QR Code Set Length 1 ...... 196 QR Code Set Length 2 ...... 197 MICRO QR CODE ...... 197 Micro QR Code Enable/Disable ...... 197 Micro QR Code Length Control ...... 198 Micro QR Code Set Length 1 ...... 198 Micro QR Code Set Length 2 ...... 199 UCC COMPOSITE ...... 200 UCC Composite Enable / Disable ...... 200 UCC Optional Composite Timer ...... 201 POSTAL CODE SELECTION ...... 202 Postnet BB Control ...... 203 Motion Features ...... 205 Motion Aiming Control ...... 205 Motion Sensitivity ...... 206 Motionless Timeout ...... 206 Wireless Features ...... 207 WIRELESS BEEPER FEATURES ...... 210 Good Transmission Beep ...... 210 Beep Frequency ...... 210 Beep Duration ...... 211 Beep Volume ...... 212 Disconnect Beep ...... 212 Docking Beep ...... 213 Leash Alarm ...... 213 CONFIGURATION UPDATES ...... 215 Automatic Configuration Update ...... 215 Copy Configuration to Scanner ...... 215 Copy Configuration to Base Station ...... 215 BATCH FEATURES ...... 216 Batch Mode ...... 216 Send Batch ...... 216 Erase Batch Memory ...... 217 RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay ...... 217 DIRECT RADIO AUTOLINK ...... 218 RF ADDRESS STAMPING ...... 218 Source Radio Address Transmission ...... 218 Source Radio Address Delimiter Character ...... 219 REAL TIME CLOCK (RTC) CONFIGURATION ...... 220 Current Date ...... 220 Current Time ...... 220 Date Tx Format ...... 221 Time Tx Format ...... 221 Date-Time Separator ...... 222 Date-Time Transmission Order ...... 223 Power Off ...... 224 Powerdown Timeout ...... 224 PBT9500-Only Features...... 225 BLUETOOTH SECURITY FEATURES ...... 225 Bluetooth Security Mode ...... 226 Bluetooth PIN Code ...... 226 Select PIN Code Length ...... 226 Set PIN Code ...... 227 OTHER BLUETOOTH FEATURES ...... 228 Reconnect Attempt Interval ...... 228 Bluetooth HID Variable PIN Code ...... 229 Bluetooth HID Alt Mode ...... 230 Bluetooth HID Send Unknown ASCII Char ...... 230 vi PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Contents

Bluetooth Max Client ...... 231 Bluetooth Friendly Name ...... 232 Bluetooth Reconnect Attempt Mode ...... 232 Power Class ...... 233 HID Country Mode ...... 233 PM9500-Only Features...... 236 STAR Radio Protocol Timeout ...... 236 STAR Radio Transmit Mode ...... 237 Changing System Speed ...... 238 Frequency Agility ...... 238 Compatibility with PM8500...... 240 Compatibility Mode ...... 240 Changing from Normal to Compatible Mode ...... 240 Changing from Compatible Mode back to Normal ...... 241 Base Address Stamping ...... 242 Base Address Delimiter Character ...... 242 RS-485 Master Header/Terminator ( Prefix/Suffix) ...... 243 RS-485 Cradle Address ...... 243 RS-485 Slave Minimum Address ...... 244 RS-485 Slave Maximum Address ...... 244 RS-485 Network Working Mode ...... 245 RS-485 Network Warning Message ...... 245 RS-485 Transmission Warning Message ...... 246 RS-485 Network Baud Rate ...... 246 Display and Keyboard Features...... 247 Display Operating Mode ...... 247 Display Off Timeout ...... 248 Backlight Enable ...... 248 Display Contrast ...... 249 Font Size ...... 249 Enable/disable buttons ...... 250 Arrow Keys Mode (4-key models only) ...... 251 Arrow Up String (4-key models only) ...... 251 Arrow Down String (4-key models only) ...... 252 CONFIGURE ACTIONS FOR FUNCTION KEYS ...... 253 Configure Actions for F1 ...... 254 Configure Actions for F2 ...... 254 Configure Actions for F3 (16-key models only) ...... 255 Configure Actions for F4 (16-key models only) ...... 255 Configure Actions for Shift (16-key models only) ...... 256 Define Strings ...... 257 Set String ID ...... 258 Set String Header ...... 258 Set String Terminator ...... 259 ADDITIONAL FEATURES FOR 16-KEY MODELS ...... 260 Last Code Shown Timeout ...... 260 Display Time Stamping Mode ...... 260 Mode Selection ...... 261 Quantity Field ...... 261 Quantity/Code Send Mode ...... 262 Quantity/Code Separator ...... 262 Interkey Timeout ...... 263 Append Code ...... 264 Echo ...... 265 Keypress Sound ...... 265 SHIFT Enable/Disable ...... 266 SHIFT key association ...... 266 Lower Case ...... 267 Set F1 Label ...... 267 Set F2 Label ...... 267 Set F3 Label ...... 268 Set F4 Label ...... 268 Barcode/Key Different Data Format ...... 269 Set Barcode Header ...... 269 Set Barcode Terminator ...... 269 Set Key Sequence ID ...... 270 Set Key Sequence Header ...... 270

Product Reference Guide vii Contents

Set Key Sequence Terminator ...... 270 REFERENCES...... 271 RS-232 Parameters ...... 272 RS-232 Only ...... 272 RS-232/USB COM Parameters ...... 273 Keyboard Interface ...... 280 Wedge Quiet Interval ...... 280 Intercharacter Delay ...... 281 Intercode Delay ...... 282 Symbologies ...... 283 Datamatrix DPM Decoding Safety ...... 283 Set Length ...... 283 Data Editing ...... 285 Global Prefix/Suffix ...... 286 Global AIM ID ...... 286 Label ID ...... 288 Character Conversion ...... 293 Reading Parameters ...... 294 Good Read LED Duration ...... 294 Scanning Features ...... 295 Scan Mode ...... 295 Stand Mode Off Time ...... 296 Scanning Active Time ...... 297 Aiming Duration Time ...... 298 Flash On Time ...... 299 Flash Off Time ...... 300 Multiple Labels Ordering by Code Symbology ...... 301 Motion Features ...... 303 Motionless Timeout ...... 303 Wireless Features ...... 304 Automatic Configuration Update ...... 304 RF Address Stamping ...... 304 PM9500-Only Features ...... 306 Changing System Speed in Normal Mode ...... 306 Bluetooth-Only Features ...... 306 MESSAGE FORMATTING...... 309 Cursor Control ...... 310 Font Selection ...... 310 Clearing Display ...... 310 LED and Beeper Control ...... 311 Setting RTC ...... 311 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ...... 313 Imager Labeling ...... 317 Standard Cable Pinouts ...... 318 LED and Beeper Indications ...... 319 Error Codes ...... 320 Base Station Indications (Cordless Models ONLY) ...... 320 SAMPLE BAR CODES...... 321 STANDARD DEFAULTS...... 325 KEYPAD...... 339 SCANCODE TABLES...... 341 Control Character Emulation ...... 341 Single Press and Release Keys ...... 341 Interface Type PC AT PS/2, USB-Keyboard or USB-Keyboard for APPLE ...... 342 Interface Type PC AT PS/2 Alt Mode or USB-Keyboard Alt Mode ...... 344 Digital Interface ...... 346 IBM31xx 102-key ...... 347 IBM XT ...... 348 Microsoft Windows Codepage 1252 ...... 349

viii PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Chapter 1 Introduction

About this Manual

This Product Reference Guide (PRG) is provided for users seeking advanced technical information, including connection, programming, maintenance and specifications. The Quick Reference Guide (QRG) and other publications associated with this product are downloadable free of charge from the website listed on the back cover of this manual.

Overview Chapter 1, (this chapter) presents information about manual conventions, and an overview of the reader, its features and operation. Chapter 2, Setup presents information about unpacking, cable connection information and setting up the reader. Chapter 3, Configuration Using Bar Codes provides instructions and bar code labels for customizing your reader. There are different sections for interface types, general features, data formatting, symbology-specific and model-specific features. Chapter 4, References provides background information and detailed instructions for more complex programming items. Chapter 5, Message Formatting gives details for programming options. Appendix A, Technical Specifications lists physical and performance characteristics, as well as environmental and regulatory specifications. It also provides standard cable pinouts and LED/Beeper functions. Appendix B, Sample Bar Codes offers sample bar codes for several common symbologies. Appendix C, Standard Defaults references common factory default settings for reader features and options. Appendix D, Keypad includes numeric bar codes to be scanned for certain parameter settings. Appendix E, Scancode Tables lists control character emulation information for Wedge and USB Keyboard interfaces.

Product Reference Guide 1 Introduction Manual Conventions The following conventions are used in this document: The symbols listed below are used in this manual to notify the reader of key issues or procedures that must be observed when using the reader:

Notes contain information necessary for properly diagnosing, repairing and operating the reader.

The CAUTION symbol advises you of actions that could damage equipment or property. CAUTION

References

Current versions of this Product Reference Guide (PRG), Quick Reference Guide (QRG), the Datalogic Aladdin™ Configuration application, and any other manuals, instruction sheets and utilities for this product can be down- loaded from the website listed below. Alternatively, printed copies or product support CDs for most products can be purchased through your Datalogic reseller.

Technical Support

Datalogic Website Support The Datalogic website (www.datalogic.com) is the complete source for technical support and information for Datalogic products. The site offers product support, warranty information, product manuals, product tech notes, software updates, demos, and instructions for returning products for repair.

Reseller Technical Support An excellent source for technical assistance and information is an authorized Datalogic reseller. A reseller is acquainted with specific types of busi- nesses, application software, and computer systems and can provide individualized assistance.

Telephone Technical Support If you do not have internet or email access, you may contact Datalogic technical support at (541) 349-8283 or check the back cover of your manual for more contact information.

2 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 About the Reader About the Reader

The PowerScan 2D is a family of feature-rich and rugged area image readers. It is offered in several different models to better fit the different needs of each customer. The main model categories are: • PD9530-XX: Corded models. • PM9500-XX: STAR-System(tm) models. • PBT9500-XX: Bluetooth models.

Within each category, further differentiating features are available, described by the part number suffix:

• D: models equipped with display and 4-key keyboard • DK: models equipped with display and 16-key keyboard • DPM: models with laser, ink jet and dot peen reading capability • HP: models with autofocus optic

Typically, units are factory-programmed for the most common terminal and communications settings. If you need to modify any programmable settings, custom configuration can be done by scanning the programming barcodes within this guide or with Datalogic Aladdin™, available from the Datalogic website. See "Datalogic Aladdin™" on page 6 for more information. Advancements in the LED technology used in the imager-based readers sig- nificantly improve the illumination of the target field of view, resulting in higher scan efficiency. Whether used in Single Trigger or Continuous Mode, the ergonomic design of the reader will help to promote comfortable handling during extended periods of use. In addition, the reader can be set up to read and output data from USA Driver License PDF417 bar codes. For more information reference the USA Driver License Parsing Quick Reference Guide (QRG), available on the Data- logic website. See "Interface Selection" on page 14 for a listing and descriptions of available interface sets by model type.

PM8500 Compatible Mode: Powerscan PM9500 offers a limited set of features compatible with the previous PM8500 family. To access those features, you have to program the system through the Compatibility Mode parameter (see "Compatibility Mode" on page 240 of the Wireless Configuration chapter). When in normal mode, the same parameter can be used to configure the communication speed.

Product Reference Guide 3 Introduction The BC9xx0™ Base Station/Charger

The BC9xx0 base station, when paired with one or more PowerScan™ 9500 readers, builds a Cordless Reading System for the collection, decoding and transmission of bar code data. It can be connected to a Host PC via RS-232, USB, or KBD Wedge, and is suited for single-cradle layouts. The BC91x0 models also provide a spare battery charger slot. The label on the cradle contains LED indicators and a multi-function button. When the button is pressed for less than 5 seconds, the cradle will transmit a "broadcast" message." When the broadcast is sent, all properly configured scanners (Radio RX Timeout set to keep the radio "awake") that are linked to that base and within radio range coverage will emit a beep and blink within 5 seconds. This functionality is useful to: • verify which scanners are linked to a certain base station • detect a scanner forgotten somewhere

When the button is pressed for longer than 5 seconds, all paired scanners will be unpaired.

The LEDs signal the BC9xx0-BT status, as shown in Table 1 on page 4.

Table 1. LED Status

LED STATUS Aux Yellow On = BC9xx0 is powered through an external power supply. Host Yellow On = BC9xx0 is powered by the Host. Green On = the reader battery is completely charged. Red On = the reader battery is charging. Orange Blinking = reader battery fault - replace battery. Reader Red / Green Alternatively Blinking = charging error - see "Error Codes" on page 320. Off = reader not in the cradle or not properly inserted. Green On = the spare battery is completely charged. Spare  Orange Blinking = spare battery fault - replace spare battery. (BC91x0 models Red/Green Alternatively Blinking = charging error - see "Error Codes" on only) page 320. Off = no spare battery in the housing or battery not fully inserted. Radio Yellow Blinking = radio activity. Ethernet  (Ethernet Green Blinking = Ethernet activity. models only)

See "Base Station Indications (Cordless Models ONLY)" on page 320 for more specific details on the LEDs.

4 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Battery Safety Battery Safety

To reinstall, charge and/or perform any other action on the battery, follow the instructions in this manual. Before installing the Battery, read “Battery Safety” on this and the following pages. Dat- alogic recommends annual replacement of rechargeable battery packs to ensure maximum performance.

Do not discharge the battery using any device except for the scanner. When the battery is used in devices other than the designated product, it may damage the battery or reduce its life expectancy. If the device causes an abnormal current to flow, it may cause WARNING the battery to become hot, explode or ignite and cause serious injury. Lithium-ion battery packs may get hot, explode or ignite and cause serious injury if exposed to abusive conditions. Be sure to follow the safety warnings listed below: • Do not place the battery pack in fire or heat. • Do not connect the positive terminal and negative terminal of the battery pack to each other with any metal object (such as wire). • Do not carry or store the battery pack together with metal objects. • Do not pierce the battery pack with nails, strike it with a hammer, step on it or otherwise subject it to strong impacts or shocks. • Do not solder directly onto the battery pack. • Do not expose the battery pack to liquids, or allow the battery to get wet. • Do not apply voltages to the battery pack contacts. In the event the battery pack leaks and the fluid gets into your eye, do not rub the eye. Rinse well with water and immediately seek medical care. If left untreated, the battery fluid could cause damage to the eye.

Always charge the battery at 32° – 104°F (0° - 40°C) temperature range. Use only the authorized power supplies, battery pack, chargers, and docks supplied by your Datalogic reseller. The use of any other power supplies can damage the device and CAUTION void your warranty. Do not disassemble or modify the battery. The battery contains safety and protection devices, which, if damaged, may cause the battery to generate heat, explode or ignite. Do not place the battery in or near fire, on stoves or other high temperature locations. Do not place the battery in direct sunlight, or use or store the battery inside cars in hot weather. Doing so may cause the battery to generate heat, explode or ignite. Using the battery in this manner may also result in a loss of performance and a shortened life expectancy. Do not place the battery in microwave ovens, high-pressure containers or on induction cookware. Immediately discontinue use of the battery if, while using, charging or storing the battery, the battery emits an unusual smell, feels hot, changes color or shape, or appears abnormal in any other way. Do not replace the battery pack when the device is turned on. Do not remove or damage the battery pack’s label. Do not use the battery pack if it is damaged in any part. Battery pack usage by children should be supervised.

As with other types of batteries, Lithium-Ion (LI) batteries will lose capacity over time. Capacity deterioration is noticeable after one year of service whether the battery is in use or not. It is difficult to precisely predict the finite life of a LI battery, but cell manufacturers rate them at 500 charge cycles. In other words, the batteries should be expected to take 500 full dis-

Product Reference Guide 5 Introduction

charge / charge cycles before needing replacement. This number is higher if partial discharging / recharging is adhered to rather than full / deep discharging, The typical manufacturer advertised useful life of LI batteries is one to three years, depending on usage and number of charges, etc., after which they should be removed from service, especially in mission critical applications. Do not continue to use a battery that is showing excessive loss of capacity, it should be properly recycled / disposed of and replaced. For most applications, batteries should be replaced after one year of service to maintain customer satisfaction and minimize safety concerns. Collect and recycle waste batteries separately from the device in compliance with European Directive 2006/66/EC, 2011/65/EU, 2002/96/EC and 2012/ 19/EU and subsequent modifications, US and China regulatory and others laws and regulations about the environment.

Programming the Reader

Configuration Methods

Programming Bar Codes The reader is factory-configured with a standard set of default features. After scanning the interface bar code, you can select other options and customize your reader through use of the instructions and programming bar code labels available in the corresponding features section for your interface. Customizable settings for many features are found in "Configuration Parameters" starting on page 21. Some programming labels, like "Restore Custom Defaults" on page 18, require only the scan of the single label to enact the change. Most, however, require the reader to be placed in Programming Mode prior to scanning them. Scan an ENTER/EXIT bar code once to enter Programming Mode. Once the reader is in Programming Mode, scan a number of parameter settings before scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code a second time, which will then accept your changes, exit Programming Mode and return the reader to normal operation.

There are some exceptions to the typical programming sequence described above. Please read the description and setting instructions carefully when configuring each programmable feature.

Datalogic Aladdin™ Datalogic Aladdin™ is a multi-platform utility program providing a quick and user-friendly configuration method via the RS-232/USB-COM interface. Aladdin allows you to program the reader by selecting configuration commands through a user-friendly graphical interface running on a PC. These commands are sent to the reader over the selected communication interface, or they can be printed as bar codes to be scanned. Aladdin also facilitates image capturing. In addition, Aladdin makes it easy to upgrade the handheld’s firmware, to attain the benefits of new reader features. Reference the Datalogic Aladdin™ Online Help for more details. Aladdin is available for download free of charge on the Datalogic website.

6 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Chapter 2 Setup

Unpacking

Check carefully to ensure the reader and any accessories ordered are present and undamaged. If any damage occurred during shipment, contact Dat- alogic Technical Support. Information is shown on page 2. KEEP THE PACKAGING. Should the unit ever require service, it should be returned in its original shipping container.

Setting Up the Reader

Follow the steps below to connect and get your reader up and communicat- ing with its host.

1. Begin by Installing the Interface Cable (Corded) or Connecting the Base Station (Bluetooth and STAR)

2. Configure Interface Settings (see page 14).

3. Configure the Reader starting on page 17 (optional, depends on settings needed)

Connect the PowerScan by plugging directly into the host device as shown. The power can also be supplied through an external power supply via the Interface Cable supplied with a power jack.

Product Reference Guide 7 Setup Connecting the Cable (Corded versions)

A B A. Rubber gasket C B. Cable Holder D C. Cover D. Connector Holder

1. Slip the cable through the Cover.

2. Push the Rubber Gasket onto the Cable 3

Holder. FRONT>>

3. Push the Cable Holder and gasket into 1 the handle. Ensure that the “Front” 2 marking on the Cable Holder is facing out, with the arrow pointing towards the front of the scanner.

4. Insert the end of the cable into the socket of the Cable Holder.

5. Push the Cover along the cable towards the reader, and hook it over the yellow 4 “tooth” on the back of the handle. 5

6. Insert the cable through the Connector Holder, and push it up into the Cover. 6 7. Insert and tighten the screw to affix the cable assembly to the reader handle.

8 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Configuring the Base Station Configuring the Base Station

To set up your BC9xx0 cradle you must:

1. Physically install the cradle.

2. Make all system connections.

3. Configure the BC9xx0 cradle.

Mounting the BC9xx0 Cradle

The cradle package contains the following items:

BC9xx0 Base Station (with Desktop Mounting 1 Metal Mounting plate Bracket installed) BC9xx0 Quick Reference Guide  1 Wall Mounting Bracket (this manual)

The cradle can be either mounted on a flat surface for desktop usage or affixed vertically to a wall.

Mounting Brackets The cradle comes with two different mounting brackets. The appropriate bracket is used depending on whether the cradle will be mounted on a horizontal or vertical surface. When shipped, the cradle has the Desktop Mount- ing Bracket installed. For vertical installation, the Wall Mounting Bracket must be attached instead. Figure 1. Mounting Brackets

Ribs Bosses

Tab Tab Tab Desktop Mounting Bracket Wall Mounting Bracket (Horizontal ) (Vertical)

• Desktop mount bracket has ribs to keep the scanner in place when the cradle is horizontal. • Wall mount bracket contains bosses to keep the scanner in place when the cradle is vertical.

Product Reference Guide 9 Setup To change the Bracket:

1. Remove the screw holding the Bracket in place. Retain the screw for re- use.

2. Carefully lift off the Bracket.

3. Install the other bracket by first slipping the end tab into place on the base station, then easing the tabs (shown in Figure 1 on page 9) into place on the sides.

4. Replace the screw to secure the Bracket to the Base Station. Figure 2. Changing the Bracket

Permanent Mounting For either desktop or wall mounting, the cradle can be fastened directly to a flat surface using screws (not included).

When mounting on drywall, the base should be screwed to a wall stud or supporting beam for additional support.

Figure 3. Base Station Bottom Rubber Feet Rubber Feet

Protective Adhesive Mounting Strips Holes

10 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Mounting the BC9xx0 Cradle Mounting for Portable Use If portability of the cradle is required, the metal plate must be used. There are two ways this can be done: (1) by first mounting the metal plate on a flat surface so the cradle can be slid off and on, or (2) mounting the metal plate onto the back of the base station and then screwing both to the desired surface. For additional security on wall mounting, it is strongly recommended that the cradle be secured into place using two auxiliary screws through the mounting holes on the side.

Mounting the Metal Plate

1. Affix the metal plate onto the desired mounting surface using the two center screw holes (see Figure 4 on page 11).

2. Remove the adhesive strips protecting the mounting tabs on the cradle, shown in Figure 3.

3. Slide the tabs on the back of the cradle onto the metal plate as shown in Figure 4.

4. After aligning the tabs, push up to lock into place. Figure 4. Mounting Plate on Wall

Product Reference Guide 11 Setup Attaching the Metal Plate to Base Alternatively, the mount can be attached first to the base, then both can be mounted to a wall as described above. Figure 5. Attaching Mounting Plate to Base

Base with Mount attached

System Connections

Connections should always be made with power off! CAUTION

The BC9xx0 cradle provides a multi-interface connector and a power supply connector as shown:

Power Supply Multi-Interface Connector

12 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Mounting the BC9xx0 Cradle Connecting and Disconnecting the Interface Cable The BC9xx0 can be connected to a Host by means of a multi-interface cable, which must be simply plugged into the Host connector, visible on the front panel of the cradle. To disconnect the cable, insert a paper clip or other similar object into the hole corresponding to the Host connector on the body of the cradle. Push down on the clip while unplugging the cable. Refer to the following figures:

Connecting/Disconnecting the Cable

Interface Emulation to Host

Power

RS-232

USB*

*The power supply is optional, the cradle can be powered by the USB port. In this case the full charging of an empty battery will take about 10 hours. For intense usage and/or when the system is shut down during the night, the use of an external power supply is recommended.

WEDGE

Product Reference Guide 13 Setup BC9xx0 Configuration The BC9xx0 configuration can be performed in three ways: by using the Datalogic Aladdin™ software configuration program, by sending configuration strings from the Host PC via the RS-232 or USB-COM interface or by reading configuration bar codes with the PowerScan™ 9500 reader. Serial Configuration By connecting the BC9xx0 to a PC through an RS-232 or USB-COM interface cable it is possible to send configuration strings from the PC to BC9xx0. Configuration Bar Codes Link the cradle and the reader using the procedures described in the Power- Scan™ PM9500 or PBT9500 Quick Reference. Once the pairing is complete, you can configure the BC9xx0 cradle by reading configuration bar codes in this manual. To configure the BC9xx0 using the PowerScan™ 9500 reader (paired to the cradle with the Bind command), follow the procedure according to the interface selected.

Interface Selection

Upon completing the physical connection between the reader and its host, proceed to Table 2 on page 15 to select the interface type the reader is connected to (for example: RS-232, Keyboard Wedge, USB, etc.). Scan the appropriate bar code in that section to configure your system’s correct interface type.

Setting the Interface Scan the programming bar code from this section which selects the appropriate interface type matching the system the reader will be connected to. Next, proceed to the corresponding section in this manual (also listed in Table 2 on page 15) to configure any desired settings and features associated with that interface. Unlike some programming features and options, interface selections require that you scan only one programming bar code label. DO NOT scan an ENTER/EXIT bar code prior to scanning an interface selection bar code. Some interfaces require the scanner to start in the disabled state when powered up. If additional scanner configuration is desired while in this state, pull the trigger and hold it for five seconds. The scanner will change to a state that allows programming with bar codes.

14 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Interface Selection

Table 2. Available Interfaces

RS-232 FEATURES

RS-232 standard interface

Select RS232-STD Set RS-232

$P,HA12,P(CR) Interface

Features

RS-232 Wincor-Nixdorf

starting

on page Select RS232-WN 25

$P,HA13,P(CR)

RS-232 for use with OPOS/UPOS/JavaPOS

Select RS-232 OPOS

USB FEATURES

$P,HA47,P(CR)

USB Com to simulate RS-232 standard interface

Select USB COM-STDa

$P,HA45,P(CR)

USB-OEM

(can be used for OPOS/UPOS/JavaPOS)

Select USB-OEM

$P,HA35,P(CR) Set USB-OEM

Interface

USB Keyboard with standard key encoding Features

starting Select USB Keyboard on page 47

$P,HA2B,P(CR)

USB Keyboard with alternate key encoding

Select USB Alternate Keyboard

$P,HA2C,P(CR)

USB Keyboard for Apple computers

Select USB-KBD-APPLE

a. Download the correct USB Com driver from www.datalogic.com

Product Reference Guide 15 Setup

KEYBOARD FEATURES

$P,HA2B,P(CR)

USB Keyboard with alternate key encoding

Select USB Alternate Keyboard

$P,HA2C,P(CR)

USB Keyboard for Apple computers

Select USB-KBD-APPLE

$P,HA29,P(CR)

AT, PS/2 25-286, 30-286, 50, 50Z, 60, 70, 80, 90 &

95 w/Standard Key Encoding Set KEYBOARD

WEDGE Select KBD-AT Interface Features

$P,HA11,P(CR) starting on

Keyboard Wedge for IBM AT PS2 with

page 37

standard key encoding but without

external keyboard

Select KBD-AT-NK

$P,HA26,P(CR)

AT, PS/2 25-286, 30-286, 50, 50Z, 60, 70, 80, 90 &

95 w/Alternate Key

Select KBD-AT-ALT

$P,HA10,P(CR)

Keyboard Wedge for IBM AT PS2 with

alternate key encoding but without

external keyboard

Select KBD-AT-ALT-NK

16 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Customizing Configuration Settings Customizing Configuration Settings

Configure Interface Settings If after scanning the interface bar code from the previous table, your installation requires you to select options to further customize your reader, turn to the appropriate section for your interface type in "Configuration Parame- ters" starting on page 21.

Global Interface Features See " Global Interface Features" on page 23 for settings configurable by all interface types.

Configuring Other Features If your installation requires different programming than the standard factory default settings, the following sections of this manual allow configuration of non-interface-specific settings you might require. Go to Configuration Using Bar Codes, starting on page 21 for a complete list of available options.

Software Version Transmission The software version of the device can be transmitted over the RS-232 and Keyboard interfaces by scanning the following label.

RevA\r

Transmit Software Version

Product Reference Guide 17 Setup Resetting the Product Configuration to Defaults

Restore Custom Defaults If you aren’t sure what programming options are in your imager, or you’ve changed some options and want to restore the Custom Default Configura- tion that may have been saved in the scanner, scan the Restore Custom Default Configuration bar code below. This will restore the custom configuration for the currently active interface.

Custom defaults are based on the interface type. Configure the imager for the correct interface before scanning this label.

$P,HA00,P(CR)

Restore Custom Default Configuration

Restore Factory Configuration The "Restore Custom Default Configuration" command above is normally enough to restart the machine from a known status (set in the factory or by the customer via configuration file). The machine is set as it arrived to you from the factory or according to the custom configuration file you loaded afterward. If you want to permanently cancel the setup defined by the configuration file use "Restore Factory Configuration" on page 338 of this manual. The programming items listed in the following sections show the factory default settings for each of the menu commands. If no configuration file has been loaded, the above command restores the factory default.

Set Date and Time

1. Scan the Enter/Exit Programming bar code below to set date and time.

ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 2. Scan the Set Date bar code + six digits for Year, Month and Day (YYMMDD) from Appendix D, Keypad. Set Date

3. Scan Set Time + six digits for Hours, Minutes and Seconds (HHMMSS) from Appendix D, Keypad. Set Time

4. Scan the Enter/Exit Programming bar code to complete.

18 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Linking the Reader Linking the Reader

Link Datalogic RF Devices to Base For RF devices, before configuring the interface it is necessary to link the handheld with the base. To link the handheld and the base, press the trigger to wake up the handheld and mount it into the base. If the reader was previously linked to another base, you must first press and hold the button on the base (>5 seconds), then scan the Unlink bar code before re-linking to the new base.

Unlink

Linking to a Bluetooth Adapter in Serial Port Profile (Slave) Mode

1. Install any drivers provided with the Bluetooth adapter.

2. Scan the Enable RF Link to Server label below to make the scanner visible to the host computer.

3. Use the host computer’s Bluetooth manager to “Discover new devices” and select "Datalogic Scanner." If you receive an error message, it may be necessary to disable security on the device.

4. Use an RS-232 terminal program to see incoming data on the port designated by the computer's Bluetooth manager.

Enable RF Link to Server

Linking to a Bluetooth Adapter in Serial Port Profile (Master) Mode

1. Ensure the PC or terminal can network with Bluetooth devices and that it is powered on.

2. Ensure that a COM port is assigned under Services in the Bluetooth setup menu.

3. Create a Link label that contains the address of the PC Bluetooth adapter. The link label is a Code 128 function 3 label with the following format:   LnkB<12 character Bluetooth address>

4. Scan the link label you created in step 3.

The Bluetooth address can be found under “Properties” within the Bluetooth setup menu.

Product Reference Guide 19 Setup Linking to a Bluetooth Adapter in HID mode

1. Install any drivers provided with the Bluetooth adapter.

2. Scan the Link to PC in HID label below.

3. Use the host computer’s Bluetooth manager to “Discover new devices” and select "Datalogic Scanner." If you receive an error message, it may be necessary to disable security on the device.

4. Use a text editor to see incoming data on the port designated by the computer's Bluetooth manager.

Link to PC in HID

The Powerscan BT9500 can be set up to require a PIN code when connecting. If you want to set up a PIN, or when adding new equipment to a system that uses a custom security PIN, please see "Bluetooth PIN Code" starting on page 226 for more information.

Power Off Scan the bar code below to shut off power to the handheld until the next trigger pull. This function only applies to the wireless models.

PowerOff

20 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Chapter 3 Configuration Using Bar Codes

This and following sections provide programming bar codes to configure your reader by changing the default settings. For details about additional methods of programming, see "Configuration Methods" on page 6. You must first enable your PowerScan to read bar codes in order to use this section. If you have not done this, go to Setup, starting on page 7 and complete the appropriate procedure.

Configuration Parameters Once the reader is set up, you can change the default parameters to meet your application needs. Refer to "Standard Defaults" starting on page 325 for initial configuration in order to set the default values and select the interface for your application. The following configuration parameters are divided into logical groups, making it easy to find the desired function based on its reference group. Interface Configuration:

• "RS-232 Only Interface" on page 25 • "RS-232/USB-Com Interfaces" on page 30 • "Keyboard EMULATION Settings" on page 37 Parameters common to all interface applications: • "Data Format" on page 49 gives options to control the messages sent to the Host system by selecting parameters to control the message strings sent to the handheld. • "Reading Parameters" on page 63 control various operating modes and indicators status functioning such as programming for scanning, beeper and LED indicators and other universal settings. • "Motion Features" on page 205 provide the ability to configure motion settings for the handheld. Wireless-Only Features • Wireless Features, starting on page 207: • PBT9500-Only Features, starting on page 225 • PM9500-Only Features, starting on page 236 • Display and Keyboard Features, starting on page 247 Symbology-specific parameters: • "1D Symbologies" on page 81 provides configuration of a personalized mix of 1D codes, code families and their options.

Product Reference Guide 21 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

• "2D Symbologies" on page 173 provides configuration of a personalized mix of 2D codes, code families and their options.

You must first enable your reader to read bar codes in order to use this section. If you have not done this, go to Setup, starting on page 7 and complete the appropriate procedure.

To program features:

1. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING bar code, available at the top of each programming page, when applicable.

2. Scan the bar code to set the desired programming feature. You may need to cover unused bar codes on the page, and possibly the facing page, to ensure that the reader reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

3. If additional input parameters are needed, go to Appendix D, Keypad, and scan the appropriate characters from the keypad. Additional information about many features can be found in the “Ref- erences” chapter. If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING bar code to exit Programming Mode.

For more detailed descriptions, programming information and examples for setting selected configuration items, see References, starting on page 271.

22 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

GLOBAL INTERFACE FEATURES The following interface features are configurable by all interface types. Host Commands — Obey/Ignore This option specifies whether the reader will obey or ignore host commands. When set to ignore, the reader will ignore all host commands except those necessary for: •service mode • flash programming mode •keeping the interface active • transmission of labels.

$CIFIH00(CR)

DEFAULT

Host Commands = Obey (Do Not Ignore Host Commands)

$CIFIH01(CR)

Host Commands = Ignore

USB Suspend Mode This setting enables/disables the ability of USB interfaces to enter suspend mode.

$CUSSE00(CR)

DEFAULT

USB Suspend Mode = Disable

$CUSSE01(CR)

USB Suspend Mode = Enable

Product Reference Guide 23 Configuration Using Bar Codes NOTES

24 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 RS-232 ONLY INTERFACE

BAUD RATE on page 26

DATA BITS on page 27

STOP BITS on page 27

PARITY on page 28

HANDSHAKING CONTROL on page 29

Use the programming bar codes in this section if modifications to the standard RS-232 interface settings are necessary to meet your system’s requirements. Additional settings which apply to both the RS-232 and USB interfaces are available in the next section, "RS-232/USB-Com Interfaces" starting on page 30. Reference Appendix C, Standard Defaults for a listing of standard factory settings.

Product Reference Guide 25 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Baud Rate See page 272 for information on this feature.

$CR2BA00(CR)

Baud Rate = 1200

$CR2BA01(CR)

Baud Rate = 2400

$CR2BA02(CR)

Baud Rate = 4800

$CR2BA03(CR)

Baud Rate = 9600

$CR2BA04(CR)

Baud Rate = 19,200

$CR2BA05(CR)

Baud Rate = 38,400

$CR2BA06(CR)

Baud Rate = 57,600

$CR2BA07(CR)

DEFAULT Baud Rate = 115,200

26 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Data Bits This parameter allows the reader to interface with devices requiring a 7-bit or 8-bit ASCII protocol for sending and receiving data.

$CR2DA00(CR)

7 Data Bits

$CR2DA01(CR) DEFAULT

8 Data Bits

Stop Bits Set the number of stop bits to match host device requirements. See page 272 for more information on this feature.

$CR2ST00(CR) DEFAULT

1 Stop Bit

$CR2ST01(CR)

2 Stop Bits

Product Reference Guide 27 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Parity This feature specifies parity required for sending and receiving data. Select the parity type according to host device requirements. See page 272 for more information.

$CR2PA00(CR) DEFAULT

Parity = None

$CR2PA01(CR)

Parity = Even

$CR2PA02(CR)

Parity = Odd

28 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Handshaking Control See page 272 for more information about this feature.

$CR2HC00(CR) DEFAULT

Handshaking Control = RTS

$CR2HC01(CR)

Handshaking Control = RTS/CTS

$CR2HC02(CR)

Handshaking Control = RTS/XON/XOFF

$CR2HC03(CR)

Handshaking Control = RTS On/CTS

$CR2HC04(CR)

Handshaking Control = RTS/CTS Scan Control

Product Reference Guide 29 RS-232/USB-COM INTERFACES

INTERCHARACTER DELAY on page 31

BEEP ON ASCII BEL on page 31

BEEP ON NOT ON FILE on page 32

ACK NAK OPTIONS on page 32

ACK CHARACTER on page 33

NAK CHARACTER on page 33

ACK NAK TIMEOUT VALUE on page 34

ACK NAK RETRY COUNT on page 34

ACK NAK ERROR HANDLING on page 35

INDICATE TRANSMISSION FAILURE on page 35

DISABLE CHARACTER on page 36

ENABLE CHARACTER on page 36

The programming bar codes in this chapter allow modifications to the standard RS-232 and USB-Com interfaces. Reference Appendix C, Standard Defaults for a listing of standard factory settings.

Product Reference Guide 30 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Intercharacter Delay This parameter specifies the intercharacter delay between the end of one character and the beginning of the next. The delay can be set within a range of zero (0) to 990 milliseconds in 10ms increments. A setting of zero specifies no delay. See page 281 for more information.

$CR2IC00(CR)

Intercharacter Delay = No Delay To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT $CR2IC PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu- meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad repre- Select Intercharacter Delay Setting senting your desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~ Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT 00 = No Intercharacter Delay

Beep On ASCII BEL When this parameter is enabled, the reader issues a beep when a character is detected on the RS-232 serial line. is issued to gain a user's attention to an illegal entry or other important event.

$CR2BB00(CR) DEFAULT Beep On ASCII BEL = Disable

$CR2BB01(CR)

Beep On ASCII BEL = Enable

Product Reference Guide 31 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Beep On Not on File This option enables/disables the action of the reader to sound a three beep sequence upon receiving a Not-On-File (NOF) host command.

$CBPNF00(CR)

Beep On Not On File = Disable

$CBPNF01(CR) DEFAULT

Beep On Not On File = Enable

ACK NAK Options This enables/disables the ability of the reader to support the RS-232 ACK/ NAK protocol.  See page 274 for more information.

$CR2AE00(CR) DEFAULT

ACK/NAK Protocol = Disable ACK/NAK

$CR2AE01(CR)

ACK/NAK Protocol = Enable for label transmission

$CR2AE02(CR)

ACK/NAK Protocol = Enable for host-command acknowledge

$CR2AE03(CR)

ACK/NAK Protocol = Enable for label transmission and host-command acknowledge

32 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

ACK Character This setting specifies an ASCII character or hex value to be used as the ACK character. ASCII characters or any hex value from 0 to 0xFF can be selected. See page 274 for more information. Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host commands conflicts with normal operation of these characters. 8-bit data is not recognized when the option Data Bits has been set as 7 Data Bits.

$CR2AC

Select ACK Character Setting

DEFAULT 0x06 ‘ACK’ Character

NAK Character This setting specifies an ASCII character or hex value to be used as the NAK character. ASCII characters or any hex value from 0 to 0xFF can be selected. Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host commands conflicts with normal operation of these characters. 8-bit data is not recognized when the option Data Bits has been set as 7 Data Bits.

See page 275 for more information.

$CR2NA

Select NAK Character Setting

DEFAULT 0x15 ‘NAK’ Character

Product Reference Guide 33 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

ACK NAK Timeout Value This option specifies the amount of time the reader waits for an ACK character from the host following label transmission. The selectable timeout range is 200 milliseconds to 15,000ms (15 seconds) in 200ms increments. A selection of 0 disables the timeout. See page 276 for more information on setting this feature.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT $CR2AT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu- meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad repre- Select ACK NAK Timeout Value Setting senting your desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~ Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT 01 ACK NAK Timeout value is 200ms

ACK NAK Retry Count This feature specifies the number of times the reader retries a label transmission due to a retry condition. The selectable range is from 1 to 254 retries. A selection of 0 disables the count, and a selection of 255 specifies unlimited retries. See page 277 for more information.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT $CR2AR PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu- meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad repre- Select ACK NAK Retry Count Setting senting your desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~ Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT 003 = 3 Retries

34 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

ACK NAK Error Handling This feature specifies the method the reader uses to handle receive errors detected while waiting for an ACK character from the host.

$CR2EH00(CR) DEFAULT

ACK NAK Error Handling = Ignore Errors Detected

$CR2EH01(CR)

ACK NAK Error Handling = Process Error as Valid ACK Char- acter

$CR2EH02(CR)

ACK NAK Error Handling = Process Error as Valid NAK Character

Indicate Transmission Failure This option enables/disables the reader’s ability to sound an error beep to indicate a transmission failure while in ACK/NAK mode.

$CR2TF00(CR)

Indicate Transmission Failure = Disable Indication

$CR2TF01(CR) DEFAULT

Indicate Transmission Failure = Enable Indication

Product Reference Guide 35 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Disable Character Specifies the value of the RS-232 host command used to disable the reader. ASCII characters or any hex value from 0 to 0xFF can be selected. Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host commands conflicts with normal operation of these characters. 8-bit data is not recognized when the option Data Bits has been set as 7 Data Bits.

See page 278 for more information on setting this feature.

$CR2DC

Select Disable Character Setting

DEFAULT 0x44 = Disable Character is ‘D’

Enable Character Specifies the value of the RS-232 host command used to enable the reader. ASCII characters or any hex value from 0 to 0xFF can be selected. Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host commands conflicts with normal operation of these characters. 8-bit data is not recognized when the option Data Bits has been set as 7 Data Bits.

See page 279 in “References” for more information on setting this feature.

$CR2EC

Select Enable Character Setting

DEFAULT 0x45 = Enable Character is ‘E’

36 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 KEYBOARD EMULATION SETTINGS

COUNTRY MODE on page 38

SEND CONTROL CHARACTERS on page 41

WEDGE QUIET INTERVAL on page 42

INTERCODE DELAY on page 42

CAPS LOCK STATE on page 43

NUMLOCK on page 43

USB KEYBOARD SPEED on page 44

USB KEYBOARD NUMERIC KEYPAD on page 45

Use the programming bar codes in this chapter to select options for USB Keyboard and Wedge Interfaces. Reference Appendix C, Standard Defaults for a listing of standard factory settings. Information about control character emulation which applies to keyboard interfaces is listed in Appendix E, Scancode Tables.

Product Reference Guide 37 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Country Mode This feature specifies the country/language supported by the keyboard. Several languages are supported:

$CKBCO00(CR) DEFAULT

Country Mode = U.S.

$CKBCO01(CR)

Country Mode = Belgium

$CKBCO02(CR)

Country Mode = Britain

Supports only the interfaces listed in the $CKBCO11(CR) Country Mode feature description.

Country Mode = Croatia

$CKBCO0E(CR) Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country Mode feature description.

Country Mode = Czech Republic

$CKBCO03(CR) Supports only the interfaces listed in the Coun- try Mode feature description.

Country Mode = Denmark

$CKBCO04(CR)

Country Mode = France

38 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Country Mode (continued)

$CKBCO13(CR) Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country Mode feature description.

Country Mode = French Canadian

$CKBCO05(CR)

Country Mode = Germany

$CKBCO0D(CR) Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country Mode feature description.

Country Mode = Hungary

$CKBCO06(CR)

Country Mode = Italy

$CKBCO0C(CR) Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country Mode feature description.

Country Mode = Japanese 106-key

$CKBCO14(CR) Supports only the interfaces listed in the Coun- try Mode feature description.

Country Mode = Lithuanian

$CKBCO07(CR)

Country Mode = Norway

Product Reference Guide 39 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Country Mode (continued)

$CKBCO12(CR) Supports only the interfaces listed in the Coun- try Mode feature description.

Country Mode = Poland

$CKBCO08(CR) Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country Mode feature description.

Country Mode = Portugal

$CKBCO10(CR) Supports only the interfaces listed in the Coun- try Mode feature description.

Country Mode = Romania

$CKBCO0F(CR) Supports only the interfaces listed in the Country Mode feature description.

Country Mode = Slovakia

$CKBCO09(CR)

Country Mode = Spain

$KBCO0A(CR)

Country Mode = Sweden

$CKBCO0B(CR) Supports only the interfaces listed in the Coun- try Mode feature description.

Country Mode = Switzerland

40 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Send Control Characters This feature specifies how the reader transmits ASCII control characters to the host. Reference Appendix E, Scancode Tables for more information about control characters. Options are as follows:

Control Character 00 : Characters from 00 to 0x1F are sent as control character Ctrl+Keys, special keys are located from 0x80 to 0xA1.

Control Character 01 : Characters from 00 to 0x1F are sent as control character Ctrl+Shift, special keys are located from 0x80 to 0xA1.

Control Character 02 : Special keys are located from 00 to 0x1F and characters from 0x80 to 0xFE are intended as an extended ASCII table (see "Microsoft Windows Codepage 1252" on page 349).

$CKBSC00(CR) DEFAULT

Wedge Send Control Characters = 00

$CKBSC01(CR)

Wedge Send Control Characters = 01

$CKBSC02(CR)

Wedge Send Control Characters = 02

Product Reference Guide 41 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Wedge Quiet Interval Specifies amount of time to look for keyboard activity before scanner breaks keyboard connection in order to transmit data to host. The selectable range for this setting is 00 to 990 milliseconds (00-0x63 by 01) in increments of ten milliseconds. See page 280 in “References” for detailed information and examples for setting this feature.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT $CKBQI PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric characters in Appendix D, Keypad representing your desired character(s). Set Wedge Quiet Interval End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~ Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT 0A = Quiet Interval is 100 milliseconds

Intercode Delay Specifies the delay between labels transmitted to the host for this interface. The selectable range for this feature is from 0 to 99 seconds. See page 282 in “References” for detailed information and examples for setting this feature.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT

$CKBID PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then

the bar code at left followed by the digits from

the Alphanumeric characters in Appendix D,

representing your desired character(s). Set Intercode Delay Keypad End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to ~ abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT 00 = No Wedge Intercode Delay

42 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Caps Lock State This option specifies the format in which the reader sends character data. This does not apply when an alternate key encoding keyboard is selected.

$CKBCL00(CR)

DEFAULT

Caps Lock State = Caps Lock OFF

$CKBCL01(CR)

Caps Lock State = Caps Lock ON

$CKBCL02(CR)

Caps Lock State = AUTO Caps Lock Enable

Numlock This option specifies the setting of the NUMLOCK key in the Keyboard Wedge interface.

$CKBNL00(CR) DEFAULT Numlock = NUMLOCK key unchanged

$CKBNL01(CR)

Numlock = Numlock key toggled

Product Reference Guide 43 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

USB Keyboard Speed This option specifies the USB poll rate for a USB keyboard.

This feature applies ONLY to the USB Keyboard interface.

$CKBSP01(CR) DEFAULT

USB Keyboard Speed = 1ms

$CKBSP02(CR)

USB Keyboard Speed = 2ms

$CKBSP03(CR)

USB Keyboard Speed = 3ms

$CKBSP04(CR)

USB Keyboard Speed = 4ms

$CKBSP05(CR)

USB Keyboard Speed = 5ms

$CKBSP06(CR)

USB Keyboard Speed = 6ms

44 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

USB Keyboard Speed (continued)

$CKBSP07(CR)

USB Keyboard Speed = 7ms

$CKBSP08(CR)

USB Keyboard Speed = 8ms

$CKBSP09(CR)

USB Keyboard Speed = 9ms

$CKBSP0A(CR)

USB Keyboard Speed = 10ms

USB Keyboard Numeric Keypad This option Controls whether numeric characters will be sent using standard keys or the numeric keypad.

$CKBKP00(CR) DEFAULT

Standard Keys

$CKBKP01(CR)

Numeric Keypad

Product Reference Guide 45 NOTES

46 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 USB-OEM INTERFACE

USB-OEM DEVICE USAGE on page 48

INTERFACE OPTIONS on page 48

Feature settings for USB interfaces differ depending upon which host type the reader will be connected with. Use the feature settings in this chapter to specifically configure for the USB-OEM interface. Other USB interfaces are included in the appropriate chapter for their host type. Reference Appendix C for a listing of standard factory settings.

Product Reference Guide 47 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

USB-OEM Device Usage The USB-OEM protocol allows for the reader to be identified as one of two different types of bar code scanners. Depending on what other scanners you may already have connected to a USB-OEM POS, you may need to change this setting to enable all devices to communicate. Options are: • Table Top Scanner • Handheld Scanner

It may be necessary to switch device usage when connecting two readers/scanners of the same type to a POS system.

$CIBUT00(CR)

USB-OEM Device Usage = Table Top Scanner

$CIBUT01(CR) DEFAULT

USB-OEM Device Usage = Handheld Scanner

Interface Options This feature provides for an interface-specific control mechanism.

$CIFO101(CR)

Obey Scanner Configuration Host Commands

$CIFO102(CR) DEFAULT

Ignore Scanner Configuration Host Commands

48 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 DATA FORMAT

GLOBAL PREFIX/SUFFIX (HEADER/TERMINA- TOR) on page 50

GLOBAL AIM ID on page 51

LABEL ID starting on page 55 •Label ID: Pre-Loaded Sets •Individually Set Label ID •Label ID Control •Label ID Symbology Selection − 1D Symbol- ogies •Label ID Symbology Selection − 2D Symbol- ogies

CASE CONVERSION on page 61

CHARACTER CONVERSION on page 61

The features in this chapter can be used to build specific user-defined data into a message string. See “References” starting on page 285 for more detailed instructions on setting these features.

Product Reference Guide 49 Enter/Exit Programming Mode Global Prefix/Suffix (Header/Terminator)

This option sets up to 20 characters each from the set of ASCII characters or any hex value from 00 to FF. The characters may be added as a prefix (in a position before the bar code data, also called a header) and/or as a suffix (in a position following the bar code data, also called a terminator). See page 286 for more detailed instructions on setting this feature. To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above to place the unit in Programming Mode, then the “Set Global Prefix” or “Set Global Suffix,” bar code followed by the digits (in hex) from the Alphanumeric characters in Appendix D Keypad representing your desired character(s). If less than the expected string of 20 characters are selected, scan the ENTER/EXIT bar code to terminate the string. Exit programming mode by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

$CLFPR

Set Global Prefix

$CLFSU

Set Global Suffix

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort ~ and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT No Global Prefix Global Suffix = 0x0D (CR)

50 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode Global AIM ID

This feature enables/disables addition of AIM IDs for all symbology types.

AIM label identifiers (as opposed to custom characters you select yourself as with label identifiers) can be included with scanned bar code data. See Table 3 on page 3-51 for a listing of AIM IDs. AIM label identifiers consist of three characters as follows: • A close brace character (ASCII ‘]’), followed by... • A code character (see some samples in the table below), followed by... • A modifier character (the modifier character is symbol dependent).

$CAIEN00(CR) DEFAULT

Global AIM ID = Disable

$CAIEN01(CR)

Global AIM ID = Enable

Table 3. AIM IDs

AIM ID code AIM ID code Tag Name character ASCII value

ABC CODABAR X 58

ANKER PLESSEY N 4E

AZTEC z 7A

CHINA SENSIBLE CODE X 58

CODABAR F 46

CODE11 H 48

CODE128 C 43

CODE32 A 41

CODE39 A 41

CODE39 CIP X 58

CODE39 DANISH PPT X 58

Product Reference Guide 51 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

AIM IDs (continued)

CODE39 LAPOSTE X 58

CODE39 PZN X 58

CODE93 G 47

DATABAR 14 e 65

DATABAR 14 COMPOSITE e 65

DATABAR EXPANDED e 65

DATABAR EXPANDED COMPOSITE e 65

DATABAR LIMITED e 65

DATABAR LIMITED COMPOSITE e 65

DATA MATRIX d 64

EAN128 C 43

EAN128 COMPOSITE C 43

EAN13 E 45

EAN13 P2 E 45

EAN13 P5 E 45

EAN13 COMPOSITE E 45

EAN8 E 45

EAN8 P2 E 45

EAN8 P5 E 45

EAN8 COMPOSITE E 45

FOLLET 2OF5 X 58

I2OF5 I 49

IATA INDUSTRIAL 2OF5 X 58

INDUSTRIAL 2OF5 X 58

ISBN X 58

ISBT128 CONCAT X 58

ISSN X 58

52 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

AIM IDs (continued)

MAXICODE U 55

MICRO QR Q 51

MICRO PDF L 4C

MSI M 4D

PDF417 L 4C

PLESSEY P 50

POSTAL AUSTRALIAN X 58

POSTAL IMB X 58

POSTAL JAPANESE X 58

POSTAL KIX X 58

POSTAL PLANET X 58

POSTAL PORTUGAL X 58

POSTAL POSTNET BB X 58

POSTAL ROYAL MAIL X 58

POSTAL SWEDISH X 58

POSTNET X 58

QR CODE Q 51

S25 S 53

TRIOPTIC X 58

UPCA E 45

UPCA P2 E 45

UPCA P5 E 45

UPCA COMPOSITE E 45

UPCE E 45

UPCE P2 E 45

UPCE P5 E 45

UPCE COMPOSITE E 45

Product Reference Guide 53 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Set AIM ID Individually for GS1-128 This feature configures a Label ID individually for the GS1-128 symbology and the programming for this works the same way as Label ID. See Label ID: Set Individually Per Symbology, starting on page 291 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

$CU8AI00(CR)

Set AIM ID Individually for GS1-128 = Disable

$CU8AI01(CR)

DEFAULT Set AIM ID Individually for GS1-128 = Enable

54 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode Label ID

A Label ID is a customizable code of up to three ASCII characters (convert to Hex using the ASCII Chart on the inside back cover of this manual), used to identify a bar code symbology type. It can be appended previous to or following the transmitted bar code data depending upon how this option is enabled. This feature provides options for configuring custom Label IDs or individually per symbology (see "Individually Set Label ID" on page 56). If you wish to program the reader to always include an industry standard label identifier for ALL symbology types, see the previous feature "Global AIM ID" on page 51. See Label ID, starting on page 288 of “References” for more information on setting this feature.

Label ID: Pre-Loaded Sets The reader supports two pre-loaded sets of Label IDs. See Label ID: Pre- loaded Sets, starting on page 288 for details on the USA set and EU set. When changing from one Label ID set to another, all other reader configuration settings, including the host interface type, will be erased and set to the standard factory defaults. Any CAUTION custom configuration or custom defaults will be lost.

$AE(CR)

Label ID Pre-loaded Set = USA Set

$Ae(CR)

DEFAULT

Label ID Pre-loaded Set = EU Set

Product Reference Guide 55 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Individually Set Label ID This feature configures a Label ID individually for a single symbology. To set, first define whether you want it as a prefix or suffix by scanning a label below. Then turn to Label ID Symbology Selection − 1D Symbologies, starting on page 57 to select the symbology you want to set, followed by up to 3 characters from the ASCII Chart at the back of this manual. See "Label ID: Set Individually Per Symbology" on page 291 for detailed instructions on setting this feature. Label ID Control This option controls whether a Label ID is disabled, or sent as a prefix or suffix for a given symbology type.

$CIDCO00(CR)

DEFAULT Label ID Transmission = Disable

$CIDCO01(CR)

Label ID Transmission = Enable as Prefix

$CIDCO02(CR)

Label ID Transmission = Enable as Suffix

56 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Label ID Symbology Selection − 1D Symbologies This option selects the symbology for which a Label ID is to be configured. See "Label ID" on page 55 or page 291 in “References” for more detailed instructions.

If less than the expected string of 3 characters are selected, scan the ENTER/EXIT bar code twice to accept the selection and exit Program- ming Mode.

$CACID $CP3ID

Set ABC Codabar Label ID Character(s) Set Code 32 Pharmacode Label ID Character(s)

$CALID $CC9ID

Set Anker Plessey Label ID Character(s) Set Code 93 Label ID Character(s)

$CPAID $CI8ID

Set Australian Postal Code Label ID Character(s) Set Concatenated ISBT 128 Label ID Character(s)

$CCBID $CDPID

Set Codabar Label ID Character(s) Set Danish PPT Label ID Character(s)

$CC1ID $C3BID

Set Code 11 Label ID Character(s) Set EAN 13 Label ID Character(s)

$CC8ID $C3MID

Set Code 128 Label ID Character(s) Set EAN 13 Composite Label ID Character(s)

$CC3ID $C32ID

Set Code 39 Label ID Character(s) Set EAN 13 P2 Label ID Character(s)

$CCCID $C35ID

Set Code 39 CIP Label ID Character(s) Set EAN 13 P5 Label ID Character(s)

Product Reference Guide 57 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Label ID Symbology Selection − 1D Symbologies (continued)

$C8BID $CXCID

Set EAN 8 Label ID Character(s) Set GS1 DataBar Expanded Composite Label ID Character(s)

$C8MID $CU8ID

Set EAN 8 Composite Label ID Character(s) Set GS1-128 Label ID Character(s)

$C82ID $CUMID

Set EAN 8 P2 Label ID Character(s) Set GS1-128 Composite Label ID Character(s)

$C85ID $CLBID

Set EAN 8 P5 Label ID Character(s) Set GSI DataBar Limited Label ID Character(s)

$CF2ID $CLCID

Set Follett 2 of 5 Label ID Character(s) GSI DataBar Limited Composite Label ID Character(s)

$C4BID $CG2ID

Set GS1 DataBar 14 Label ID Character(s) Set GTIN 2 Label ID Character(s)

$C4CID $CG5ID

Set GS1 DataBar 14 Composite Label ID Character(s) Set GTIN 5 Label ID Character(s)

$CXBID $CGBID

Set GS1 DataBar Expanded Label ID Character(s) Set GTIN 8 Label ID Character(s)

$CIAID $CLPID

Set IATA Industrial 2 of 5 Label ID Character(s) Set LaPoste Code 39 Label ID Character(s)

58 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Label ID Symbology Selection − 1D Symbologies (continued)

$CPMID $CMSID

Set IMB Postal Code Label ID Character(s) Set MSI Label ID Character(s)

$CU2ID $CPPID

Set Industrial 2 of 5 Label ID Character(s) Set Planet Postal Code Label ID Character(s)

$CI2ID $CPLID

Set Interleaved 2 of 5 Label ID Character(s) Set Plessey Label ID Character(s)

$CISID $CPGID

Set ISBN Label ID Character(s) Set Portugal Postal Code Label ID Character(s)

$CINID $CPNID

Set ISSN Label ID Character(s) Set Postnet Label ID Character(s)

$CPJID $CPKID

Set Japan Postal Code Label ID Character(s) Set Kix Postal Code Label ID Character(s)

$CPZID $CPBID

Set PZN Code Label ID Character(s) Set Postnet BB Label ID Character(s)

$CPRID $CAMID

Set Royal Postal Code Label ID Character(s) Set UPC-A Composite Label ID Character(s)

$CS2ID $CA2ID

Set Standard 2 of 5 Label ID Character(s) Set UPC-A P2 Label ID Character(s)

Product Reference Guide 59 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Label ID Symbology Selection − 1D Symbologies (continued)

$CPSID $CA5ID

Set Swedish Postal Code Label ID Character(s) Set UPC-A P5 Label ID Character(s)

$CCTID $CEBID

Set Trioptic Code Label ID Character(s) Set UPC-E Label ID Character(s)

$CABID $CE5ID

Set UPC-A Label ID Character(s) Set UPC-E P5 Label ID Character(s)

Label ID Symbology Selection − 2D Symbologies

$CAZID $CMXID

Set Aztec Label ID Character(s) Set Maxicode Label ID Character(s)

$CCSID $CP4ID

Set China Sensible Label ID Character(s) Set PDF 417 Label ID Character(s)

$CCFID $CMIID

Set Codablock F Label ID Character(s) Set Micro PDF 417 Label ID Character(s)

$CDMID $CQRID

Set Data Matrix Label ID Character(s) Set QR Code Label ID Character(s)

$CMQID

Set Micro QR Label ID Character(s)

60 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Label ID Advanced Formatting: User Label Edit Advanced formatting is available to create user label edit scripts. See the Datalogic Aladdin configuration application or contact Technical Support.

Case Conversion This feature allows conversion of the case of all alphabetic characters to upper or lower case.

Case conversion affects ONLY scanned bar code data, and does not affect Label ID, Prefix, Suffix, or other appended data.

$CLFCA00(CR)

DEFAULT Case Conversion = Disable (no case conversion)

$CLFCA01(CR)

Case Conversion = Convert to upper case $CLFCA02(CR)

Case Conversion = Convert to lower case Character Conversion Character conversion is an eight byte configuration item. The eight bytes are 4 character pairs represented in hexadecimal ASCII values. The first character in the pair is the character that will be converted. The second character in the pair is the character to convert to. If the character to convert in a pair is FF, then no conversion is done. If less than the expected string of 16 characters are selected, scan the ENTER/EXIT bar code twice to accept the selections and exit Programming Mode.

$CLFCH

Configure Character Conversion

DEFAULT 0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF (No character conversion)

Product Reference Guide 61 NOTES

62 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 READING PARAMETERS

DOUBLE READ TIMEOUT on page 64 SCANNING ACTIVE TIME on page 74

LED AND BEEPER INDICATORS on page STAND ILLUMINATION CONTROL on page 66 74

POWER ON ALERT on page 66 FLASH ON TIME on page 75

GOOD READ: WHEN TO INDICATE on page FLASH OFF TIME on page 75 66

GOOD READ BEEP TYPE on page 67 AIMING POINTER on page 76

GOOD READ BEEP FREQUENCY on page AIMING DURATION TIMER on page 76 67

GOOD READ BEEP LENGTH on page 68 GREEN SPOT DURATION on page 77

PARTIAL LABEL READING CONTROL on GOOD READ BEEP VOLUME on page 69 page 77

GOOD READ LED DURATION on page 70 DECODE NEGATIVE IMAGE on page 78

SCAN MODE on page 71 IMAGE CAPTURE on page 78

STAND MODE INDICATION on page 72 MULTIPLE LABELS PER FRAME on page 79

MULTIPLE LABELS ORDERING BY CODE PICK MODE on page 72 SYMBOLOGY on page 80

MULTIPLE LABELS ORDERING BY CODE STAND MODE SENSITIVITY on page 73 LENGTH on page 80

STAND MODE ILLUMINATION OFF TIME on page 73

Product Reference Guide 63 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Double Read Timeout Double Read Timeout prevents a double read of the same label by setting the minimum time allowed between reads of labels of the same symbology and data. If the unit reads a label and sees the same label again within the specified timeout, the second read is ignored. Double Read Timeout does not apply to scan modes that require a trigger pull for each label read.

$CSNDR0A(CR)

Double Read Timeout = 0.1 Second

$CSNDR14(CR)

Double Read Timeout = 0.2 Second

$CSNDR1E(CR)

Double Read Timeout = 0.3 Second

$CSNDR28(CR)

Double Read Timeout = 0.4 Second

$CSNDR32(CR)

Double Read Timeout = 0.5 Second

$CSNDR3C(CR) DEFAULT Double Read Timeout = 0.6 Second

$CSNDR46(CR)

Double Read Timeout = 0.7 Second

64 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Double Read Timeout (continued)

$CSNDR50(CR)

Double Read Timeout = 0.8 Second

$CSNDR5A(CR)

Double Read Timeout = 0.9 Second

$CSNDR64(CR)

Double Read Timeout = 1 Second

Product Reference Guide 65 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

LED AND BEEPER INDICATORS

Power On Alert Disables or enables the indication (from the Beeper) that the reader is receiving power.

$CBPPU00(CR)

Power On Alert = Disable (No Audible Indication)

$CBPPU01(CR) DEFAULT

Power On Alert = Power-up Beep

Good Read: When to Indicate This feature specifies when the reader will provide indication (beep and/or flash its green LED) upon successfully reading a bar code.

$CBPIN00(CR) DEFAULT

Indicate Good Read = After Decode

$CBPIN01(CR)

Indicate Good Read = After Transmit

$CBPIN02(CR)

Indicate Good Read = After CTS goes inactive then active

66 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Good Read Beep Type Specifies whether the good read beep has a mono or bitonal beep sound.

$CBPTY00(CR) DEFAULT

Good Read Beep Type = Mono

$CBPTY01(CR)

Good Read Beep Type = Bitonal

Good Read Beep Frequency Adjusts the good read beep to sound at a selectable low, medium or high frequency, selectable from the list below. (Controls the beeper’s pitch/ tone.)

$CBPFR00(CR)

Good Read Beep Frequency = Low

$CBPFR01(CR)

Good Read Beep Frequency = Medium

$CBPFR02(CR)

DEFAULT

Good Read Beep Frequency = High

Product Reference Guide 67 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Good Read Beep Length

$CBPLE06(CR)

Good Read Beep Length = 60 msec

$CBPLE08(CR)

DEFAULT

Good Read Beep Length = 80 msec

$CBPLE0A(CR)

Good Read Beep Length = 100 msec

$CBPLE0C(CR)

Good Read Beep Length = 120 msec

$CBPLE0E(CR)

Good Read Beep Length = 140 msec

$CBPLE10(CR)

Good Read Beep Length = 160 msec

$CBPLE12(CR)

Good Read Beep Length = 180 msec

$CBPLE14(CR)

Good Read Beep Length = 200 msec

68 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Good Read Beep Volume Selects the beeper volume (loudness) upon a good read beep. There are three selectable volume levels.

$CBPVO00CR)

Good Read Beep Volume = Beeper Off

$CBPVO01CR)

Good Read Beep Volume = Low

$CBPVO02CR)

Good Read Beep Volume = Medium

$CBPVO03CR)

DEFAULT

Good Read Beep Volume = High

Product Reference Guide 69 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Good Read LED Duration This feature specifies the amount of time that the Good Read LED remains on following a good read. The good read LED on time can be set within a range of 100 milliseconds to 25,500 milliseconds (0.1 to 25.5 seconds) in 100ms increments. A setting of 00 keeps the LED on until the next trigger pull. See page 294 in “References” for detailed instructions and examples for setting this feature.

$CLAGL00(CR)

Good Read LED Duration Setting = Keep LED on until next trigger pull To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT

$CLAGL PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar

code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-

meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad repre-

senting your desired character(s). End by scanning Select Good Read LED Duration Setting the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort ~ and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

003 = Good Read LED DEFAULT stays on for 300 ms.

Indicators are dimmed during sleep.

70 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

SCANNING FEATURES

Scan Mode Selects the reader’s scan operating mode. See page 295 in “References” for descriptions.

$CSNRM00(CR)

DEFAULT Scan Mode = Trigger Single

$CSN-

Scan Mode = Trigger Hold Multiple

$CSNRM02(CR)

Scan Mode = Trigger Pulse Multiple

$CSN-

Scan Mode = Flashing

$CSN-

Scan Mode = Always On

$CSN-

Scan Mode = Stand Mode

Product Reference Guide 71 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Stand Mode Indication This operation is useful for indicating when the reader is in Stand Mode. If enabled, the blue indicator will blink when Stand Mode scanning is active.

$CSMFL00(CR)

DEFAULT

Stand Mode Indication = Disable

$CSMFL01(CR)

Stand Mode Indication = Enable

Pick Mode Specifies the ability of the reader to decode labels only when they are close to the center of the aiming pattern. This allows the reader to accurately target labels when they are placed close together, such as on a pick sheet.

This feature is not compatible with Multiple Labels Reading in a Volume.

$CSNPM00(CR) DEFAULT

Pick Mode = Disable

$CSNPM01(CR)

Pick Mode = Enable

72 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Stand Mode Sensitivity Sets the sensitivity level for stand mode wakeup. Choices are low, medium and high.

$CSMSE00(CR)

Stand Mode Sensitivity = Low

$CSMSE01(CR)

DEFAULT

Stand Mode Sensitivity = Medium

$CSMSE02(CR)

Stand Mode Sensitivity = High

Stand Mode Illumination Off Time Specifies the amount of time reader illumination stays off after pulling the trigger when in Stand Mode. The configurable range is 01 to 32 by 01 in increments of 500ms (500ms to 16 seconds). See page 296 in “References” for a description of this feature.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT $CSNTM PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu- meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad representing your desired character(s). End by scanning Select Stand Mode Time Setting the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

DEFAULT 04 = 2 Seconds

Product Reference Guide 73 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Scanning Active Time This setting specifies the amount of time that the reader stays in scan ON state once the state is entered. The range for this setting is from 1 to 255 seconds in 1-second increments. See page 297 in “References” for further description of this feature.

$CSNET03(CR)

Scanning Active Time = 3 seconds

$CSNET05(CR)

DEFAULT

Scanning Active Time = 5 seconds

$CSNET08(CR)

Scanning Active Time = 8 seconds

Stand Illumination Control Controls the illumination status while the reading mode is stand mode and the reader is attempting to detect objects.

$CSMIL00(CR)

DEFAULT Stand Illumination Control = OFF

$CSMIL01(CR)

Stand Illumination Control = ON

$CSMIL02(CR)

Stand Illumination Control = Dim

74 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Flash On Time This feature specifies the ON time for the indicator LED while in Flash Mode. The selectable range is 100 to 9,900 milliseconds (0.1 to 9.9 seconds), in 100 millisecond increments. See page 299 in “References” for detailed information on setting this feature.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT

$CSNFN PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar

code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-

meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad representing your desired character(s). End by scanning Select Flash ON Time Setting the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort ~ and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT 10 = Flash is ON for 1 Second

Flash Off Time This feature specifies the OFF time for the indicator LED while in Flash Mode. The selectable range is 100 to 9,900 milliseconds (0.1 to 9.9 seconds), in 100 millisecond increments. See page 300 in “References” for detailed information on setting this feature.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT $CSNFF

PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar

code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-

meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad repre- Select Flash OFF Time Setting senting your desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~ Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT 06 = Flash is OFF for 600ms

Product Reference Guide 75 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Aiming Pointer Enables/disables the aiming pointer for all symbologies.

$CTAAP00(CR)

Aiming Pointer = Disable

$CTAAP01(CR)

DEFAULT Aiming Pointer = Enable

Aiming Duration Timer Specifies the frame of time the aiming pointer remains on after decoding a label, when in trigger single mode.The range for this setting is from 1 to 255 seconds in 1-second increments. See page 298 in “References” for a description of this feature.

LSTM00

DEFAULT

Aiming Off After Decoding

To configure, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING LSTM

MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left fol-

lowed by the digits from the Alphanumeric charac-

ters in Appendix D, Keypad representing your Set Aiming Duration Timer desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/ EXIT bar code.

~ Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

76 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Green Spot Duration Specifies the duration of the good read pointer beam after a good read.

$CLSSP00(CR)

Green Spot Duration = Disable (Green Spot is Off)

$CLSSP01(CR)

DEFAULT Green Spot Duration = Short (300 msec)

$CLSSP02(CR)

Green Spot Duration = Medium (500 msec)

$CLSSP03(CR)

Green Spot Duration = Long (800 msec)

Partial Label Reading Control Enable/Disable the option to ignore partial labels to be read within the boundary of the field of view.

IPPL00

Partial Label Reading Control = Disable

IPPL01

Partial Label Reading Control = Enable

Product Reference Guide 77 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Decode Negative Image Enable/Disable the ability to decode a negative image for all symbologies. When this feature is enabled, you will be unable to read normally-printed labels or programming labels in this manual. Scan the “Disable” bar code below to return the scanner to its default for this feature. The reader can also be set to decode both positive and negative codes for certain 2D codes. See " 2D Normal/Inverse Symbol Control" on page 175 for information on this feature. For additional options, see the Aladdin configuration application.

Unlike some programming features and options, Decode Negative Image selections require that you scan only one programming bar code label. DO NOT scan an ENTER/EXIT bar code prior to scanning a Decode Negative Image bar code.

When this feature is enabled, you will be unable to read other programming labels in this manual. CAUTION

$P,CIPVR00,P(C R)

DEFAULT

Decode Negative Image = Disable

$P,CIPVR01,P(CR)

Decode Negative Image = Enable

Image Capture Image capature is supported by RS-232 and USB-COM interfaces only. For information and a list of options for Image Capture, use the Datalogic Alad- din configuration application, available for free download from the Datalogic Scanning website.

78 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

MULTIPLE LABEL READING In standard (default) mode, when the reader’s aiming system is activated (by a trigger pull, motion or other method depending on the mode), it then acquires and processes each image in the area in front of it (the Volume). In this case, the scanner stops processing the image once it decodes a label. If several labels are present in the volume, only the first label encountered is decoded and sent. When Multiple Reading Mode is enabled, the scanner keeps on processing the image until all the labels present are decoded. The reader then sorts the data from all the bar codes (if configured to do so) before transmitting it.

Multiple Labels per Frame Specifies the ability of the reader to decode and transmit a set of code labels in a specific volume and in a single frame of time. When in Multiple Labels per Frame the reader beeps and turns on the good read LED indication for each code read in a frame. When Multiple Labels Mode is enabled, ISBT pairing, ABC Codabar pairing, and composites are not allowed.

$CSNML00(CR)

DEFAULT Multiple Labels per Frame = Disable

$CSNML01(CR)

Multiple Labels per Frame = Enable

Product Reference Guide 79 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Multiple Labels Ordering by Code Symbology This feature allows you to specify the order multiple labels are transmitted by symbology type, when Multiple Labels per Frame is enabled. See page 301 in “References” for detailed information on setting this feature.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT $CSNMS PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits From the alphanumeric characters In Appendix d, keypad representing your desired Character(s). end by scanning the Select Symbologies for Multiple Labels Ordering enter/exit bar code again.

~ Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT 000000000000 = Random order

Multiple Labels Ordering by Code Length Specifies the transmission ordering by code length, when Multiple Labels per Frame is enabled.

$CSNMT00(CR)

DEFAULT Multiple Labels Ordering = Disable

$CSNMT01(CR) $CSNMT02(CR)

Transmit Increasing Length Order Transmit Decreasing Length Order

80 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 1D SYMBOLOGIES The reader supports the following 1D symbologies (bar code types). See "2D Symbologies" starting on page 173 for 2D bar codes. Symbology-dependent options are included in each chapter.

Disable All Symbologies, page 82 GS1-128, page 119 Code EAN/UPC, page 83 Code ISBT 128, page 120 UPC-E, page 86 Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5), page 123 GTIN Formatting, page 89 Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR, page 128 EAN 13 (Jan 13), page 90 Follett 2 of 5, page 128 ISSN, page 92 Standard 2 of 5, page 129 EAN 8 (Jan 8), page 93 Industrial 2 of 5, page 133 UPC/EAN Global Settings, page 95 Code IATA, page 137 Add-Ons, page 97 Codabar, page 138 Code 39, page 103 ABC Codabar, page 144 Trioptic Code, page 109 Code 11, page 147 Code 32 (Ital Pharmaceutical Code), page 109 GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional, page 151 Code 39 CIP (French Pharmaceutical), page 111 GS1 DataBar™ Expanded, page 152 Code 39 Danish PPT, page 111 GS1 DataBar™ Limited, page 157 Code 39 LaPoste, page 112 Code 93, page 158 Code 39 PZN, page 112 MSI, page 163 Code 128, page 113 Plessey, page 168

Default settings are indicated at each feature/option with a green arrow. Also reference Appendix C, Standard Defaults for a listing of the most widely used set of standard factory settings. To set most features:

1. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING bar code at the top of applicable programming pages.

2. Scan the correct bar code to set the desired programming feature or parameter. You may need to cover unused bar codes on the page, and possibly the facing page, to ensure that the reader reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING bar code to exit Programming Mode.

Product Reference Guide 81 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

DISABLE ALL SYMBOLOGIES Use this feature to disable all symbologies.

1. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING Mode bar code.

2. Scan the Disable All Symbologies bar code.

3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING bar code.

$AD(CR)

Disable All Symbologies

This does not disable the reading of programming labels.

82 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

CODE EAN/UPC

Coupon Control This feature is used to control the reader’s method of processing coupon labels.

$CCPLC00(CR)

Coupon Control = Allow all coupon bar codes to be decoded

$CCPLC01(CR) DEFAULT

Coupon Control = Enable only UPCA coupon decoding

$CCPLC02(CR)

Coupon Control = Enable only GS1 DataBar™ coupon decoding

Product Reference Guide 83 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

UPC-A The following options apply to the UPC-A symbology.

UPC-A Enable/Disable When disabled, the reader will not read UPC-A bar codes.

$CABEN00(CR)

UPC-A = Disable

$CABEN01(CR) DEFAULT

UPC-A = Enable

UPC-A Check Character Transmission Enable this option to transmit the check character along with UPC-A bar code data.

$CABCT00(CR)

UPC-A Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send

$CABCT01(CR) DEFAULT

UPC-A Check Character Transmission = Send

84 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Expand UPC-A to EAN-13 Expands UPC-A data to the EAN-13 data format. Selecting this feature also changes the symbology ID to match those required for EAN-13.

$CAB3B00(CR) DEFAULT

UPC-A to EAN-13 = Don’t Expand

$CAB3B01(CR)

UPC-A to EAN-13 = Expand

UPC-A Number System Character Transmission This feature enables/disables transmission of the UPC-A number system character.

$CABNS00(CR)

UPC-A Number System Character = Do not transmit

$CABNS01(CR) DEFAULT

UPC-A Number System Character = Transmit

Product Reference Guide 85 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

UPC-A 2D Component This feature enables/disables a requirement that a 2D label component be decoded when a base label of this symbology is decoded.

$CAB2D00(CR) DEFAULT

EAN-13 2D Component = Disable (2D component not required)

$CAB2D01(CR)

EAN-13 2D Component = 2D component must be decoded

UPC-E The following options apply to the UPC-E symbology.

UPC-E Enable/Disable When disabled, the reader will not read UPC-E bar codes.

$CEBEN00(CR)

UPC-E = Disable

$CEBEN01(CR) DEFAULT

UPC-E = Enable

86 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

UPC-E Check Character Transmission Enable this option to transmit the check character along with UPC-E bar code data.

$CEBCT00(CR)

UPC-E Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send

$CEBCT01(CR) DEFAULT

UPC-E Check Character Transmission = Send

UPC-E 2D Component This feature enables/disables a requirement that a 2D label component be decoded when a base label for this symbology is decoded.

$CEB2D00(CR) DEFAULT

UPC-E 2D Component = Disable (2D component not required)

$CEB2D01(CR)

UPC-E 2D Component = 2D component must be decoded

Product Reference Guide 87 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Expand UPC-E to EAN-13 Expands UPC-E data to the EAN-13 data format. Selecting this feature also changes the symbology ID to match those required for EAN-13.

$CEB3B00(CR) DEFAULT

UPC-E to EAN-13 = Don’t Expand

$CEB3B01(CR)

UPC-E to EAN-13 = Expand

Expand UPC-E to UPC-A Expands UPC-E data to the UPC-A data format.

$CEBAB00(CR) DEFAULT

UPC-E to UPC-A = Don’t Expand

$CEBAB01(CR)

UPC-E to UPC-A = Expand

88 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

UPC-E Number System Character Transmission This feature enables/disables transmission of the UPC-E system number character.

$CEBNS00(CR)

UPC-E Number System Character = Do not transmit

$CEBNS01(CR) DEFAULT

UPC-E Number System Character = Transmit

GTIN FORMATTING This feature enables/disables the ability to convert UPC-E, UPC-A, EAN 8, and EAN 13 labels into the GTIN 14-character format. If add-on information is present on the base label prior to the conversion taking place, the add-on information will be appended to the converted GTIN label.

$CGBEN00(CR) DEFAULT

GTIN Formatting = Disable

$CGBEN01(CR)

GTIN Formatting = Enable

Product Reference Guide 89 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

EAN 13 (JAN 13) The following options apply to the EAN 13 (Jan 13) symbology.

EAN 13 Enable/Disable When disabled, the reader will not read EAN 13/JAN 13 bar codes.

$C3BEN00(CR)

EAN 13 = Disable

$C3BEN01(CR) DEFAULT

EAN 13 = Enable

EAN 13 Check Character Transmission Enable this option to transmit the check character along with EAN 13 bar code data.

$C3BCT00(CR)

EAN 13 Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send

$C3BCT01(CR) DEFAULT

EAN 13 Check Character Transmission = Send

90 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

EAN-13 Flag 1 Character Enables/disables transmission of an EAN/JAN13 Flag1 character. The Flag 1 character is the first character of the label.

$C3BF100(CR)

EAN-13 Flag 1 Char= Don’t transmit

$C3BF101(CR) DEFAULT

EAN-13 Flag 1 Char= Transmit

EAN-13 ISBN Conversion This option enables/disables conversion of EAN 13/JAN 13 Bookland labels starting with 978 to ISBN labels.

$C3BIS00(CR) DEFAULT

EAN-13 ISBN Conversion = Disable

$C3BIS01(CR)

EAN-13 ISBN Conversion = Convert to ISBN

Product Reference Guide 91 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

EAN-13 2D Component This feature enables/disables a requirement that a 2D label component be decoded when a base label of this symbology is decoded.

$C3B2D00(CR) DEFAULT

EAN-13 2D Component = Disable (2D component not required)

$C3B2D01(CR)

EAN-13 2D Component = 2D component must be decoded

ISSN The following options apply to the ISSN symbology.

ISSN Enable/Disable Enables/disables conversion of EAN/JAN13 Bookland labels starting with 977 to ISSN labels.

$C3BIN00(CR) DEFAULT

ISSN = Disable

$C3BIN01(CR)

ISSN = Enable

92 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

EAN 8 (JAN 8) The following options apply to the EAN 8 (Jan 8) symbology.

EAN 8 Enable/Disable When disabled, the reader will not read EAN 8/JAN 8 bar codes.

$C8BEN00(CR)

EAN 8 = Disable

$C8BEN01(CR) DEFAULT

EAN 8 = Enable

EAN 8 Check Character Transmission Enable this option to transmit the check character along with EAN 8 bar code data.

$C8BCT00(CR)

EAN 8 Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send

$C8BCT01(CR) DEFAULT

EAN 8 Check Character Transmission = Send

Product Reference Guide 93 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Expand EAN 8 to EAN 13 Enable this option to expand EAN 8/JAN 8 labels to EAN 13/JAN 13.

$C8B3B00(CR) DEFAULT

Expand EAN 8 to EAN 13 = Disable

$C8B3B01(CR)

Expand EAN 8 to EAN 13 = Enable

EAN 8 2D Component This feature enables/disables a requirement that a 2D label component be decoded when a base label for this symbology is decoded.

$C8B2D00(CR) DEFAULT

EAN 8 2D Component = Disable (2D component not required)

$C8B2D01(CR)

EAN 8 2D Component = 2D component must be decoded

94 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

UPC/EAN GLOBAL SETTINGS This section provides configuration settings for UPC-A, UPC-E, EAN 13 and EAN 8 symbologies, and affects all of these unless otherwise marked for each feature description.

UPC/EAN Price Weight Check This feature enables/disables calculation and verification of price/weight check digits.

$CPWEN00(CR) DEFAULT

Price Weight Check = Disabled

$CPWEN01(CR)

Price Weight Check = 4-digit price-weight check

$CPWEN02(CR)

Price Weight Check = 5-digit price-weight check

$CPWEN03(CR)

Price Weight Check = European 4-digit price-weight check

$CPWEN04(CR)

Price Weight Check = European 5-digit price-weight check

Product Reference Guide 95 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

UPC/EAN Quiet Zones This feature specifies the number of quiet zones for UPC/EAN labels. Quiet zones are blank areas at the ends of a bar code, typically 10 times the width of the narrowest bar or space in the label. The property applies to all EAN- UPC symbologies globally and to the ADDONs.

$CUNLO02(CR)

DEFAULT

UPC/EAN Quiet Zones = Two Modules

$CUNLO03(CR)

UPC/EAN Quiet Zones = Three Modules

96 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

ADD-ONS Contact Customer Support for advanced programming of optional and conditional add-ons. Optional Add-ons The reader can be enabled to optionally read the following add-ons (sup- plementals): If a UPC/EAN base label and an add-on are both decoded, the reader will transmit the base label and add-on. If a UPC/EAN base label is decoded without an add-on, the base label will be transmitted without an add-on.  Conditional add-on settings (if enabled) are considered by the reader before optional add-on settings.

$CADO200(CR) DEFAULT

Optional Add-Ons = Disable P2

$CADO201(CR)

Optional Add-Ons = Enable P2

$CADO500(CR) DEFAULT

Optional Add-Ons = Disable P5

$CADO501(CR)

Optional Add-Ons = Enable P5

$CADO800(CR) DEFAULT

Optional Add-Ons = Disable GS1-128

$CADO801(CR)

Optional Add-Ons = Enable GS1-128

Product Reference Guide 97 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Optional Add-On Timer This option sets the time the reader will look for an add-on when an add-on fragment has been seen and optional add-ons are enabled. (Also see "Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer" on page 100.)

$CADOT01(CR)

Optional Add-on Timer = 10ms

$CADOT02(CR)

Optional Add-on Timer = 20ms

$CADOT03(CR)

Optional Add-on Timer = 30ms

$CADOT04(CR)

Optional Add-on Timer = 40ms

$CADOT05(CR)

Optional Add-on Timer = 50ms

$CADOT06(CR)

Optional Add-on Timer = 60ms

$CADOT07(CR) DEFAULT

Optional Add-on Timer = 70ms

$CADOT0A(CR)

Optional Add-on Timer = 100ms

98 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Optional Add-On Timer (continued)

$CADOT0C(CR)

Optional Add-on Timer = 120ms

$CADOT0E(CR)

Optional Add-on Timer = 140ms

$CADOT10(CR)

Optional Add-on Timer = 160ms

$CADOT12(CR)

Optional Add-on Timer = 180ms

$CADOT14(CR)

Optional Add-on Timer = 200ms $CADOT16(CR)

Optional Add-on Timer = 220ms

$CADOT18(CR)

Optional Add-on Timer = 240ms

$CADOT1A(CR)

Optional Add-on Timer = 260ms

Product Reference Guide 99 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Optional Add-On Timer (continued)

$CADOT1C(CR)

Optional Add-on Timer = 280ms

$CADOT1E(CR)

Optional Add-on Timer = 300ms

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer This option sets the timer expiration value to read the added part after reading the linear EAN/UPC part. For UPC/EAN add-ons other than those of that type, see "Optional Add-On Timer" on page 98.

$CADUT00(CR) DEFAULT

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = Disable

$CADUT01(CR)

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 10ms

$CADUT02(CR)

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 20ms

$CADUT03(CR)

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 30ms

100 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer (continued)

$CADUT04(CR)

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 40ms

$CADUT05(CR)

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 50ms

$CADUT06(CR)

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 60ms

$CADUT07(CR)

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 70ms

$CADUT0A(CR)

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 100ms

$CADUT0C(CR)

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 120ms

$CADUT0E(CR)

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 140ms

$CADUT10(CR)

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 160ms

Product Reference Guide 101 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer (continued)

$CADUT12(CR)

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 180ms

$CADUT14(CR)

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 200ms $CADUT16(CR)

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 220ms

$CADUT18(CR)

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 240ms

$CADUT1A(CR)

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 260ms

$CADUT1C(CR)

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 280ms

$CADUT1E(CR)

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer = 300ms

102 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

CODE 39 The following options apply to the Code 39 symbology.

Code 39 Enable/Disable

$CC3EN00(CR)

Code 39 = Disable

$CC3EN01(CR) DEFAULT

Code 39 = Enable

Code 39 Check Character Calculation Enable this option to enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Code 39 check character. When disabled, any check character in the label is treated as a data character

$CC3CC00(CR) DEFAULT

Code 39 Check Character Calculation = Don’t Calculate

$CC3CC01(CR)

Code 39 Check Character Calculation = Calculate Std Check

$CC3CC02(CR)

Code 39 Check Character Calculation = Calculate Mod 7 Check

Product Reference Guide 103 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 39 Check Character Calculation (continued)

$CC3CC04(CR)

Code 39 Check Character Calculation = Enable Italian Post Check

$CC3CC08(CR)

Code 39 Check Character Calculation = Enable Daimler Chrysler Check

Code 39 Check Character Transmission Enable this option to transmit the check character along with Code 39 bar code data.

$CC3CT00(CR)

Code 39 Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send

$CC3CT01(CR) DEFAULT

Code 39 Check Character Transmission = Send

104 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 39 Start/Stop Character Transmission Enable this option to enable/disable transmission of Code 39 start and stop characters.

$CC3SS00(CR) DEFAULT

Code 39 Start/Stop Character Transmission = Don’t Transmit

$CC3SS01(CR)

Code 39 Start/Stop Character Transmission = Transmit

Code 39 Full ASCII Enables/disables the translation of Code 39 characters to Code 39 full- ASCII characters.

$CC3FA00(CR) DEFAULT

Code 39 Full ASCII = Disable

$CC3FA01(CR)

Code 39 Full ASCII = Enable

Product Reference Guide 105 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 39 Quiet Zones This feature specifies the number of quiet zones for Code 39 labels. Quiet zones are blank areas at the ends of a bar code, typically 10 times the width of the narrowest bar or space in the label.

$CC3LO02(CR)

Code 39 Quiet Zones = Quiet Zones on two sides

$CC3LO03(CR) DEFAULT

Code 39 Quiet Zones = Small Quiet Zones on two sides

Code 39 Length Control This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the Code 39 symbology.

Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.

Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CC3LC00(CR) DEFAULT

Code 39 Length Control = Variable Length

$CC3LC01(CR)

Code 39 Length Control = Fixed Length

106 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 39 Set Length 1 This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for Code 39 Length Con- trol. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s data characters only. The length can be set from 0 to 50 characters. Table 4 provides examples for setting Length 1. See page 283 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

Table 4. Code 39 Length 1 Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES

1 Desired Setting 00 Characters 07 Characters 15 Characters 50 Characters

2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

3 Scan SELECT CODE 39 LENGTH 1 SETTING Scan Two Characters From 4 ‘0’ and ‘0’ ‘0’ and ‘7’ ‘1’ and ‘5’ ‘5’ AND ‘0’ Appendix D, Keypad 5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

$CC3L1

Select Code 39 Set Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort ~ and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT 02 = Length 1 is 2 Characters

Product Reference Guide 107 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 39 Set Length 2 This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for Code 39 Length Con- trol. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s check, data, and full-ASCII shift characters. The length does not include start/stop characters. Table 5 provides examples for setting Length 2. See page 284 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

Table 5. Code 39 Length 2 Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES 00 (Ignore This 1 Desired Setting 07 Characters 15 Characters 50 Characters Length) 2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

3 Scan SELECT CODE 39 LENGTH 2 SETTING Scan Two Characters From 4 ‘0’ and ‘0’ ‘0’ and ‘7’ ‘1’ and ‘5’ ‘5’ AND ‘0’ Appendix D, Keypad 5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING .MODE

$CC3L2

Select Code 39 Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort ~ and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT 50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters

108 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

TRIOPTIC CODE The following options apply to the Trioptic symbology. Trioptic Code Enable/Disable

$CCTEN00(CR) DEFAULT

Trioptic Code = Disable

$CCTEN01(CR)

Trioptic Code = Enable

CODE 32 (ITAL PHARMACEUTICAL CODE) The following options apply to the Code 32 (Italian Pharmaceutical Code) symbology. Code 32 Enable/Disable When disabled, the reader will not read Code 32 bar codes.

$CP3EN00(CR) DEFAULT

Code 32 = Disable

$CP3EN01(CR)

Code 32 = Enable Code 32 Feature Setting Exceptions

The following features are set for Code 32 by using these Code 39 settings: "Code 39 Quiet Zones" on page 106 "Code 39 Length Control" on page 106 "Trioptic Code" on page 109

Product Reference Guide 109 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 32 Check Character Transmission Enable this option to transmit the check character along with Code 32 bar code data.

$CP3CT00(CR) DEFAULT

Code 32 Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send

$CP3CT01(CR)

Code 32 Check Character Transmission = Send

Code 32 Start/Stop Character Transmission This option enables/disables transmission of Code 32 start and stop characters.

$CP3SS00(CR) DEFAULT

Code 32 Start/Stop Character Transmission = Don’t Transmit

$CP3SS01(CR)

Code 32 Start/Stop Character Transmission = Transmit

110 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

CODE 39 CIP (FRENCH PHARMACEUTICAL) The following options apply to the Code 39 CIP symbology.

Code 39 CIP Enable/Disable Enables/Disables ability of the reader to decode Code 39 CIP labels.

$CCCEN00(CR) DEFAULT

Code 39 CIP = Disable

$CCCEN01(CR)

Code 39 CIP = Enable

CODE 39 DANISH PPT The following options apply to the Code 39 Danish PPT symbology.

Code 39 Danish PPT Enable/Disable Enables/Disables AIM ID for Code 39 Danish PPT Codes.

$CDPEN00(CR) DEFAULT

Code 39 Danish PPT = Disable

$CDPEN01(CR)

Code 39 Danish PPT = Enable

Product Reference Guide 111 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

CODE 39 LAPOSTE The following options apply to the Code 39 LaPoste symbology.

Code 39 LaPoste Enable/Disable Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Code39 La Poste labels.

$CLPEN00(CR) DEFAULT

Code 39 LaPoste = Disable

$CLPEN01(CR)

Code 39 LaPoste = Enable

CODE 39 PZN The following options apply to the Code 39 PZN symbology.

Code 39 PZN Enable/Disable Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Code39 PZN labels.

$PZEN00(CR) DEFAULT

Code 39 PZN = Disable

$PZEN01(CR)

Code 39 PZN = Enable

112 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

CODE 128 The following options apply to the Code 128 symbology.

Code 128 Enable/Disable When disabled, the reader will not read Code 128 bar codes.

$CC8EN00(CR)

Code 128 = Disable

$CC8EN01(CR) DEFAULT

Code 128 = Enable

Expand Code 128 to Code 39 This feature enables/disables expansion of Code 128 labels to Code 39 labels.

$CC8C300(CR) DEFAULT

Code 128 to Code 39 = Don’t Expand

$CC8C301(CR)

Code 128 to Code 39 = Expand

Product Reference Guide 113 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 128 Check Character Transmission Enable this option to transmit the check character along with Code 128 bar code data.

$CC8CT00(CR) DEFAULT

Code 128 Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send

$CC8CT01(CR)

Code 128 Check Character Transmission = Send

Code 128 Function Character Transmission Enables/disables transmission of Code128 function characters 1, 2, 3, and 4.

$CC8TF00(CR) DEFAULT

Code 128 Function Character Transmission = Don’t Send

$CC8TF01(CR)

Code 128 Function Character Transmission = Send

114 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 128 Sub-Code Exchange Transmission Enables/disables the transmission of “Sub-Code Exchange” characters (NOT transmitted by standard decoding).

$CC8SC00(CR) DEFAULT

Code 128 Sub-Code Exchange Transmission = Disable

$CC8SC01(CR)

Code 128 Sub-Code Exchange Transmission = Enable Code 128 Quiet Zones This feature specifies the number of quiet zones for Code 128 labels. Quiet zones are blank areas at the ends of a bar code and are typically 10 times the width of the narrowest bar or space in the label.

$CC8LO02(CR)

Code 128 Quiet Zones = Quiet Zones on two sides

$CC8LO03(CR) DEFAULT

Code 128 Quiet Zones = Small Quiet Zones on two sides

Product Reference Guide 115 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 128 Length Control This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the Code 128 symbology. See page 283 for more information.

$CC8LC00(CR) DEFAULT

Code 128 Length Control = Variable Length

$CC8LC01(CR)

Code 128 Length Control = Fixed Length

116 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 128 Set Length 1 Specifies one of the bar code lengths for Code 128 Length Control. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s data characters only. The length can be set from 1 to 80 characters. Table 6 provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 283 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

Table 6. Code 128 Length 1 Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES

1 Desired Setting 01 Character 07 Characters 15 Characters 80 Characters

2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

3 Scan SELECT CODE 128 LENGTH 1 SETTING Scan Two Characters From 4 ‘0’ and ‘1’ ‘0’ and ‘7’ ‘1’ and ‘5’ ‘8’ AND ‘0’ Appendix D, Keypad 5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

$CC8L1

Select Code 128 Set Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort ~ and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT 01 = Length 1 is 1 Character

Product Reference Guide 117 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 128 Set Length 2 This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for Code 128 Length Con- trol. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s data characters only. The length can be set from 1 to 80 characters. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore this length (only one fixed length). Table 7 provides examples for setting Length 2. See page 284 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

Table 7. Code 128 Length 2 Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES 00 (Ignore This 1 Desired Setting 07 Characters 15 Characters 80 Characters Length) 2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

3 Scan SELECT CODE 128 LENGTH 2 SETTING Scan Two Characters From 4 ‘0’ and ‘0’ ‘0’ and ‘7’ ‘1’ and ‘5’ ‘8’ and 0’ Appendix D, Keypad 5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

$CC8L2

Select Code 128 Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort ~ and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT 80 = Length 2 is 80 Characters

118 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

GS1-128 The following options apply to the GS1-128 symbology. (Also known as USS-128, GS1-128, GTIN-128, UCC-128, EAN-128.)

GS1-128 Enable This option enables/disables the ability of the reader to translate GS1-128 labels to the GS1-128 data format. Options are: • Transmit GS1-128 labels in Code 128 data format. • Transmit GS1-128 labels in GS1-128 data format. • Do not transmit GS1-128 labels.

$CU8EN00CR)

GS1-128 = Transmit in Code 128 data format

$CU8EN01CR) DEFAULT GS1-128 = Transmit in GS1-128 data format

$CU8EN02CR)

GS1-128 = Do not transmit GS1-128 labels

GS1-128 2D Component This feature enables/disables a requirement that a 2D label component be decoded when a base label of this symbology is decoded.

$CU82D00(CR) DEFAULT

GS1-128 2D Component = Disable

$CU82D01(CR)

GS1-128 2D Component = Enable

Product Reference Guide 119 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

CODE ISBT 128 The following options apply to the ISBT 128 symbology.

ISBT 128 Concatenation Use this option to enable/disable ISBT128 concatenation of 2 labels.

$CI8CE00(CR) DEFAULT

ISBN 128 Concatenation = Disable

$CI8CE01(CR)

ISBN 128 Concatenation = Enable

ISBT 128 Force Concatenation When enabled, this feature forces concatenation for ISBT.

This option is only valid when ISBT 128 Concatenation is enabled.

$CI8FC00(CR) DEFAULT

ISBT 128 Force Concatenation = Disable

$CI8FC01(CR)

ISBT 128 Force Concatenation = Enable

120 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

ISBT 128 Concatenation Mode Specifies the concatenation mode between Static and Dynamic.

This option is only valid when ISBT 128 Concatenation is enabled (see "ISBT 128 Concatenation" on page 120).

$CI8CM00CR) DEFAULT

ISBT 128 Concatenation Mode = Static

$CI8CM01CR)

ISBT 128 Concatenation Mode = Dynamic

Product Reference Guide 121 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout Specifies the timeout used by the ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Mode.

$CI8DT05(CR)

ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 50 msec

$CI8DT0A(CR)

ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 100 msec

DEFAULT $CI8DT14(CR)

ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 200 msec

$CI8DT32(CR)

ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 500 msec

$CI8DT4B(CR)

ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 750 msec

$CI8DT64(CR)

ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 1 second

ISBT 128 Advanced Concatenation Options

To set up pairs of label types for concatenation, use the Datalogic Aladdin configuration application or contact Datalogic Technical Support, as described on page 2.

122 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5 (I 2 OF 5) The following options apply to the I 2 of 5 symbology.

I 2 of 5 Enable/Disable When disabled, the reader will not read I 2 of 5 bar codes.

$CI2EN00(CR) DEFAULT

I 2 of 5 = Disable

$CI2EN01(CR)

I 2 of 5 = Enable

Product Reference Guide 123 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation This option enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional I 2 of 5 check character. Combinations of these settings are possible via the Alad- din configuration utility, or contact Technical Support.

$CI2CC00(CR) DEFAULT

I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Disable

$CI2CC01(CR)

I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Check Standard (Modulo 10)

$CI2CC02(CR)

I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Check German Parcel

$CI2CC04(CR)

I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Check DHL

$CI2CC08(CR)

I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Check Daimler Chrys- ler

$CI2CC10(CR)

I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Check Bosch

$CI2CC20(CR)

I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Italian Post

124 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

I 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission Enable this option to transmit the check character along with I 2 of 5 bar code data.

$CI2CT00(CR)

I 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send

$CI2CT01(CR) DEFAULT

I 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission = Send

I 2 of 5 Length Control This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the I 2 of 5 symbology.

Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.

Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CI2LC00(CR) DEFAULT

I 2 of 5 Length Control = Variable Length

$CI2LC01(CR)

I 2 of 5 Length Control = Fixed Length

Product Reference Guide 125 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

I 2 of 5 Set Length 1 This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for I 2 of 5 Length Control. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. The length includes the bar code’s check and data characters. The length can be set from 2 to 50 characters in increments of two. Table 8 provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 283 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

Table 8. I 2 of 5 Length 1 Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES

1 Desired Setting 2 Characters 6 Characters 14 Characters 50 Characters

Pad with leading zeroes to 2 02 06 14 50 yield two digits

3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 4 Scan SELECT I 2 of 5 LENGTH 1 SETTING

Scan Two Characters From 5 ‘0’ and ‘2’ ‘0’ and ‘6’ ‘1’ and ‘4’ ‘5’ AND ‘0’ Appendix D, Keypad 6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

$CI2L1

Select I 2 of 5 Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort ~ and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT 06 = Length 1 is 6 Characters

126 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

I 2 of 5 Set Length 2 This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for I 2 of 5 Length Con- trol. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. The length includes the bar code’s check and data characters. The length can be set from 2 to 50 characters. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore this length (only one fixed length). Table 9 provides examples for setting Length 2. See page 284 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

Table 9. I 2 of 5 Length 2 Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES Ignore This 1 Desired Setting 4 Characters 14 Characters 50 Characters Length Pad with leading zeroes to 2 00 04 14 50 yield two digits 3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

4 Scan SELECT I 2 OF 5 LENGTH 2 SETTING

Scan Two Characters From 5 ‘0’ and ‘0’ ‘0’ and ‘4’ ‘1’ and ‘4’ ‘5’ AND ‘0’ Appendix D, Keypad 6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

$CI2L2

Select I 2 of 5 Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort ~ and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT 50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters

Product Reference Guide 127 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

INTERLEAVED 2 OF 5 CIP HR The following options apply to the Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR symbology.

Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR Enable/Disable Enables/Disables ability of reader to decode Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR labels.

$CCHEN00(CR) DEFAULT

Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR = Disable

$CCHEN01(CR)

Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR = Enable

FOLLETT 2 OF 5 The following options apply to the Follett 2 of 5 symbology.

Follett 2 of 5 Enable/Disable Enables/Disables ability of reader to decode Plessey labels.

$CF2EN00(CR) DEFAULT

Follett 2 of 5 = Disable

$CF2EN01(CR)

Follett 2 of 5 = Enable

128 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

STANDARD 2 OF 5 The following options apply to the Standard 2 of 5 symbology.

Standard 2 of 5 Enable/Disable When disabled, the reader will not read Standard 2 of 5 bar codes.

$C2SEN00(CR) DEFAULT

Standard 2 of 5 = Disable

$C2SEN01(CR)

Standard 2 of 5 = Enable

Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation This option enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Standard 2 of 5 check character.

$CS2CC00(CR) DEFAULT

Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Disable

$CS2CC01(CR)

Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Enable

Product Reference Guide 129 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission This feature enables/disables transmission of an optional Standard 2 of 5 check character.

$CS2CT00(CR)

Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send

$CS2CT01(CR) DEFAULT

Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission = Send

Standard 2 of 5 Length Control This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the Standard 2 of 5 symbology.

Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.

Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CS2LC00(CR) DEFAULT

Standard 2 of 5 Length Control = Variable Length

$CS2LC01(CR)

Standard 2 of 5 Length Control = Fixed Length

130 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Standard 2 of 5 Set Length 1 This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for Standard 2 of 5 Length Control. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s check and data characters. The length can be set from 1 to 50 characters. Table 10 provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 283 if you want detailed instructions on setting this feature.

Table 10. Standard 2 of 5 Length 1 Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES

1 Desired Setting 01 Character 07 Characters 15 Characters 50 Characters

2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

3 Scan SELECT STANDARD 2 OF 5 LENGTH 1 SETTING Scan Two Characters From 4 ‘0’ and ‘1’ ‘0’ and ‘7’ ‘1’ and ‘5’ ‘5’ AND ‘0’ Appendix D, Keypad 5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

$CS2L1

Select Standard 2 of 5 Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort ~ and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT 08 = Length 1 is 8 Characters

Product Reference Guide 131 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Standard 2 of 5 Set Length 2 This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for Standard 2 of 5 Length Control. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s check and data characters. The length can be set from 1 to 50 characters. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore this length (only one fixed length). Table 11 provides examples for setting Length 2. See page 284 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

Table 11. Standard 2 of 5 Length 2 Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES

Desired Setting (pad with 00 (Ignore This 1 07 Characters 15 Characters 50 Characters leading zeroes) Length)

2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

3 Scan SELECT STANDARD 2 OF 5 LENGTH 2 SETTING Scan Two Characters From 4 ‘0’ and ‘0’ ‘0’ and ‘7’ ‘1’ and ‘5’ ‘5’ AND ‘0’ Appendix D, Keypad 5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

$CS2L2

Select Standard 2 of 5 Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort ~ and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT 50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters

132 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

INDUSTRIAL 2 OF 5 The following options apply to the Industrial 2 of 5 symbology.

Industrial 2 of 5 Enable/Disable Enables/Disables ability of reader to decode Industrial 2 of 5 labels.

$CU2EN00(CR) DEFAULT

Industrial 2 of 5 = Disable

$CU2EN01(CR)

Industrial 2 of 5 = Enable

Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation Enables/Disables calculation and verification of an optional Industrial 2 of 5 check character.

$CU2CC00(CR) DEFAULT

Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Disable

$CU2CC01(CR)

Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation = Enable

Product Reference Guide 133 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission Enables/disables transmission of an Industrial 2 of 5 check character.

$CU2CT00(CR)

Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission = Disable

$CU2CT01(CR) DEFAULT

Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission = Enable

Industrial 2 of 5 Length Control This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the Industrial 2 of 5 symbology.

Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.

Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CU2LC00(CR) DEFAULT

Industrial 2 of 5 Length Control = Variable Length

$CU2LC01(CR)

Industrial 2 of 5 = Fixed Length

134 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Industrial 2 of 5 Set Length 1 This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for Industrial 2 of 5 Length Control. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s data characters only. The length can be set from 0 to 50 characters. Table 12 provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 283 if you want detailed instructions on setting this feature.

Table 12. Industrial 2 of 5 Length 1 Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES

1 Desired Setting 00 Characters 07 Characters 15 Characters 50 Characters

2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

3 Scan SELECT INDUSTRIAL 2 OF 5 LENGTH 1 SETTING

Scan Two Characters From 4 ‘0’ and ‘0’ ‘0’ and ‘7’ ‘1’ and ‘5’ ‘5’ AND ‘0’ Appendix D, Keypad 5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

$CU2L1

Select Industrial 2 of 5 Set Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort ~ and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT 01 = Length 1 is 1 Character

Product Reference Guide 135 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Industrial 2 of 5 Set Length 2 This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for Industrial 2 of 5 Length Control. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s check, data, and full-ASCII shift characters. The length does not include start/stop characters. The length can be set from 1 to 50 characters. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore this length (only one fixed length). Table 13 provides examples for setting Length 2. See page 284 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

Table 13. Industrial 2 of 5 Length 2 Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES 00 (Ignore This 1 Desired Setting 07 Characters 15 Characters 50 Characters Length) 2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

3 Scan SELECT INDUSTRIAL 2 OF 5 LENGTH 2 SETTING

Scan Two Characters From 4 ‘0’ and ‘0’ ‘0’ and ‘7’ ‘1’ and ‘5’ ‘5’ AND ‘0’ Appendix D, Keypad 5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

$CU2L2

Select Industrial 2 of5 Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort ~ and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT 50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters

136 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

CODE IATA The following options apply to the IATA symbology.

IATA Enable/Disable Enables/Disables the ability of the reader to decode IATA labels.

$CIAEN00(CR) DEFAULT

IATA = Disable

$CIAEN01(CR)

IATA = Enable

IATA Check Character Transmission Enables/Disables calculation and verification of an optional Industrial 2 of 5 check character.

$CIACT00(CR)

IATA Check Character Transmission = Disable

$CIACT01(CR) DEFAULT

IATA Check Character Transmission = Enable

Product Reference Guide 137 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

CODABAR The following options apply to the Codabar symbology.

Codabar Enable/Disable When disabled, the reader will not read Codabar bar codes.

$CCBEN00(CR) DEFAULT

Codabar = Disable

$CCBEN01(CR)

Codabar = Enable

Codabar Check Character Calculation Enable this option to enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Codabar check character. When disabled, any check character in the label is treated as a data character

$CCBCC00(CR) DEFAULT

Codabar Check Character Calculation = Don’t Calculate

$CCBCC01(CR)

Codabar Check Character Calculation = Enable AIM standard check char.

$CCBCC02(CR)

Codabar Check Character Calculation = Enable Modulo 10 check char.

138 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Codabar Check Character Transmission Enable this option to transmit the check character along with Codabar bar code data.

$CCBCT00(CR)

Codabar Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send

$CCBCT01(CR) DEFAULT

Codabar Check Character Transmission = Send

Codabar Start/Stop Character Transmission Enable this option to enable/disable transmission of Codabar start and stop characters.

$CCBSS00(CR)

Codabar Start/Stop Character Transmission = Don’t Transmit

$CCBSS01(CR) DEFAULT

Codabar Start/Stop Character Transmission = Transmit

Product Reference Guide 139 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Codabar Start/Stop Character Set This option specifies the format of transmitted Codabar start/stop characters.

$CCBSC00(CR)

Codabar Check Character Set = ABCD/TN*E

$CCBSC01(CR)

Codabar Check Character Set = ABCD/ABCD

$CCBSC02(CR)

Codabar Check Character Set = abcd/tn*e

$CCBSC03(CR) DEFAULT

Codabar Check Character Set = abcd/abcd

Codabar Start/Stop Character Match When enabled, this option requires that start and stop characters match.

$CCBSM00(CR) DEFAULT

Codabar Start/Stop Character Match = Don’t Require Match

$CCBSM01(CR)

Codabar Start/Stop Character Match = Require Match

140 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Codabar Quiet Zones Specifies the number of quiet zones for Codabar labels. Quiet zones are blank areas at the ends of a bar code and are typically 10 times the width of the narrowest bar or space in the label.

$CCBLO02(CR) DEFAULT

Codabar Quiet Zones = Quiet Zones on two sides

$CCBLO03(CR)

Codabar Quiet Zones = Small Quiet Zones on two sides

Codabar Length Control This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the Codabar symbology.

Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.

Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CCBLC00(CR) DEFAULT

Codabar Length Control = Variable Length

$CCBLC01(CR)

Codabar Length Control = Fixed Length

Product Reference Guide 141 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Codabar Set Length 1 This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for Codabar Length Con- trolCodabar Length Control. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Vari- able Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s start, stop, check and data characters. The length must include at least one data character. The length can be set from 3 to 50 characters. Table 14 provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 283 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

Table 14. Codabar Length 1 Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES

Desired Setting (and pad 1 03 Characters 09 Characters 15 Characters 50 Characters with leading zeroes) 2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

3 Scan SELECT CODABAR LENGTH 1 SETTING

Scan Two Characters From 4 ‘0’ and ‘3’ ‘0’ and ‘9’ ‘1’ and ‘5’ ‘5’ AND ‘0’ Appendix D, Keypad 5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

$CCBL1

Select Codabar Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort ~ and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT 03 = Length 1 is 3 Characters

142 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Codabar Set Length 2 This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for Codabar Length Con- trolCodabar Length Control. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. The length includes the bar code’s start, stop, check and data characters. The length must include at least one data character. The length can be set from 3 to 50 characters. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore this length (only one fixed length). Table 15 provides examples for setting Length 2. See page 284 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

Table 15. Codabar Length 2 Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES

Desired Setting (and pad 00 Ignore This 1 07 Characters 15 Characters 50 Characters with leading zeroes) Length 2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

3 Scan SELECT CODABAR LENGTH 2 SETTING

Scan Two Characters From 4 ‘0’ and ‘0’ ‘0’ and ‘7’ ‘1’ and ‘5’ ‘5’ AND ‘0’ Appendix D, Keypad 5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

$CCBL2

Select Codabar Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort ~ and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT 50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters

Product Reference Guide 143 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

ABC CODABAR The following options apply to the ABC Codabar symbology.

ABC Codabar Enable/Disable Enables/Disables ability of reader to decode ABC Codabar labels.

$CCBAB00(CR) DEFAULT

ABC Codabar = Disable

$CCBAB01(CR)

ABC Codabar = Enable

ABC Codabar Concatenation Mode Specifies the concatenation mode between Static and Dynamic.

$CCBCM00(CR) DEFAULT

ABC Codabar Concatenation Mode = Static

$CCBCM01(CR)

ABC Codabar Concatenation Mode = Dynamic

144 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout Specifies the timeout in 10-millisecond ticks used by the ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Mode.

$CCBDT05(CR)

ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 50 msec

$CCBDT0A(CR)

ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 100 msec

$CCBDT14(CR) DEFAULT

ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 200 msec

$CCBDT32(CR)

ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 500 msec

$CCBDT4B(CR)

ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 750 msec

$CCBDT64(CR)

ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation Timeout = 1 Second

Product Reference Guide 145 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

ABC Codabar Force Concatenation Forces labels starting or ending with D to be concatenated.

$CCBFC00(CR) DEFAULT

ABC Codabar Force Concatenation = Disable

$CCBFC01(CR)

ABC Codabar Force Concatenation = Enable

146 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

CODE 11 The following options apply to the Code 11 symbology.

Code 11 Enable/Disable When disabled, the reader will not read Code 11 bar codes.

$CC1EN00(CR) DEFAULT

Code 11 = Disable

$CC1EN01(CR)

Code 11 = Enable

Code 11 Check Character Calculation This option enables/disables calculation and verification of optional Code 11 check character.

$CC1CC00(CR)

Code 11 Check Character Calculation = Disable

$CC1CC01(CR)

Code 11 Check Character Calculation = Check C

$CC1CC02(CR)

Code 11 Check Character Calculation = Check K

$CC1CC03(CR) DEFAULT

Code 11 Check Character Calculation = Check C and K

Product Reference Guide 147 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 11 Check Character Transmission This feature enables/disables transmission of an optional Code 11 check character.

$CC1CT00(CR)

Code 11 Check Character Transmission = Don’t Send

$CC1CT01(CR) DEFAULT

Code 11 Check Character Transmission = Send

Code 11 Length Control This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the Code 11 symbology.

Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.

Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CC1LC00(CR) DEFAULT

Code 11 Length Control = Variable Length

$CC1LC01(CR)

Code 11 Length Control = Fixed Length

148 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 11 Set Length 1 This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for Code 11 Length Con- trol. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s check and data characters. The length can be set from 2 to 50 characters. Table 16 provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 283 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

Table 16. Code 11 Length 1 Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES Desired Setting (pad with 1 02 Characters 07 Characters 15 Characters 50 Characters leading zeroes)

2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 3 Scan SELECT CODE 11 LENGTH 1 SETTING

Scan Two Characters From 4 ‘0’ and ‘2’ ‘0’ and ‘7’ ‘1’ and ‘5’ ‘5’ AND ‘0’ Appendix D, Keypad 5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

$CC1L1

Select Code 11 Set Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort ~ and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT 04 = Length 1 is 4 Characters

Product Reference Guide 149 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 11 Set Length 2 This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for Code 11 Length Con- trol. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s check and data characters. The length can be set from 2 to 50 characters. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore this length (only one fixed length). Table 17 provides examples for setting Length 2. See page 284 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

Table 17. Code 11 Length 2 Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES

Desired Setting (pad with 00 (Ignore This 1 07 Characters 15 Characters 50 Characters leading zeroes) Length)

2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

3 Scan SELECT CODE 11 LENGTH 2 SETTING Scan Two Characters From 4 ‘0’ and ‘0’ ‘0’ and ‘7’ ‘1’ and ‘5’ ‘5’ and 0’ Appendix D, Keypad 5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

$CC1.2

Select Code 11 Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort ~ and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT 50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters

150 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

GS1 DATABAR™ OMNIDIRECTIONAL The following options apply to the GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional (formerly RSS-14) symbology.

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Enable/Disable When disabled, the reader will not read GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional bar codes.

$C4BEN00(CR) DEFAULT

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional = Disable

$C4BEN01(CR)

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional = Enable

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional GS1-128 Emulation When enabled, GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional bar codes will be translated to the GS1-128 label data format.

$C4BU800(CR) DEFAULT

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional GS1-128 Emulation = Dis- able

$C4BU801(CR)

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional GS1-128 Emulation = Enable

Product Reference Guide 151 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional 2D Component This feature enables/disables a requirement that a 2D label component be decoded when a base label for this symbology is decoded.

$C4B2D00(CR) DEFAULT

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional 2D Component = Disable (2D component not required)

$C4B2D01(CR)

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional 2D Component = 2D component must be decoded

GS1 DATABAR™ EXPANDED The following options apply to the GS1 DataBar™ Expanded (formerly RSS Expanded) symbology.

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Enable/Disable When disabled, the reader will not read GS1 DataBar™ Expanded bar codes.

$CXBEN00(CR) DEFAULT

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded = Disable

$CXBEN01(CR)

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded = Enable

152 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded GS1-128 Emulation When enabled, GS1 DataBar™ Expanded bar codes will be translated to the GS1-128 label data format.

$CXBU800(CR) DEFAULT

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded GS1-128 Emulation = Disable

$CXBU801(CR)

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded GS1-128 Emulation = Enable

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded 2D Component This feature enables/disables a requirement that a 2D label component be decoded when a base label of this symbology is decoded.

$CXB2D00(CR) DEFAULT

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded 2D Component = Disable

$CXB2D01(CR)

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded 2D Component = Enable

Product Reference Guide 153 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Length Control This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the GS1 DataBar™ Expanded symbology.

Variable Length: For variable-length decoding, a minimum length may be set.

Fixed Length: For fixed-length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CXBLC00(CR) DEFAULT

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Length Control = Variable Length

$CXBLC01(CR)

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Length Control = Fixed Length

154 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Set Length 1 This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Length Control. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Vari- able Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s data characters only. The length can be set from 1 to 74 characters. Table 18 provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 283 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

Table 18. GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Length 1 Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES

1 Desired Setting 01 Character 07 Characters 52 Characters 74 Characters

2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

3 Scan SELECT GS1 DataBar™ EXPANDED LENGTH 1SETTING

Scan Two Characters From 4 ‘0’ and ‘1’ ‘0’ and ‘7’ ‘5’ and ‘2’ ‘7’ AND ‘4’ Appendix D, Keypad 5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

$CXBL1

Select GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Set Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort ~ and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT 01 = Length 1 is 1 Character

Product Reference Guide 155 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Set Length 2 This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Length Control. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Vari- able Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s data characters only. The length can be set from 1 to 74 characters. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore this length (only one fixed length). Table 19 provides examples for setting Length 2. See page 284 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

Table 19. GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Length 2 Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES 00 (ignore sec- 1 Desired Setting 07 Characters 52 Characters 74 Characters ond length) 2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

3 Scan SELECT GS1 DataBar™ EXPANDED LENGTH 2 SETTING

Scan Two Characters From 4 ‘0’ and ‘0’ ‘0’ and ‘7’ ‘5’ and ‘2’ ‘7’ and ‘4’ Appendix D, Keypad 5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

$CXBL2

Select GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Set Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort ~ and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT 74 = Length 2 is 74 Characters

156 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

GS1 DATABAR™ LIMITED The following options apply to the GS1 DataBar™ Limited (formerly RSS Lim- ited) symbology.

GS1 DataBar™ Limited Enable/Disable When disabled, the reader will not read GS1 DataBar™ Limited bar codes.

$CLBEN00(CR) DEFAULT

GS1 DataBar™ Limited = Disable

$CLBEN01(CR)

GS1 DataBar™ Limited = Enable

GS1 DataBar™ Limited GS1-128 Emulation When enabled, GS1 DataBar™ Limited bar codes will be translated to the GS1-128 label data format.

$CLBU800(CR) DEFAULT

GS1 DataBar™ Limited GS1-128 Emulation = Disable

$CLBU801(CR)

GS1 DataBar™ Limited GS1-128 Emulation = Enable

Product Reference Guide 157 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

GS1 DataBar™ Limited 2D Component This feature enables/disables a requirement that a 2D label component be decoded when a base label of this symbology is decoded.

$CLB2D00(CR) DEFAULT

GS1 DataBar™ Limited 2D Component = Disable (2D component not required)

$CLB2D01(CR)

GS1 DataBar™ Limited 2D Component = 2D component must be decoded

CODE 93 The following options apply to the Code 93 symbology. Code 93 Enable/Disable Enables/Disables ability of reader to decode Code 93 labels.

$CC9EN00(CR) DEFAULT

Code 93 = Disable

$CC9EN01(CR)

Code 93 = Enable

158 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 93 Check Character Calculation Enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Code 93 check character.

$CC9CC00(CR)

Code 93 Check Character Calculation = Disable

$CC9CC01(CR)

Code 93 Check Character Calculation = Enable Check C

$CC9CC02(CR)

Code 93 Check Character Calculation = Enable Check K

$CC9CC03(CR) DEFAULT

Code 93 Check Character Calculation = Enable Check C and K

Code 93 Check Character Transmission Enables/disables transmission of an optional Code 93 check character.

$CC9CT00(CR)

Code 93 Check Character Transmission = Disable

$CC9CT01(CR) DEFAULT

Code 93 Check Character Transmission = Enable

Product Reference Guide 159 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 93 Length Control This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the Code 93 symbology.

Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.

Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CC9LC00(CR) DEFAULT

Code 93 Length Control = Variable Length

$CC9LC01(CR)

Code 93 = Fixed Length

160 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 93 Set Length 1 Specifies one of the bar code lengths for Code 93 Length Control. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s data characters only. The length can be set from 01 to 50 characters. Table 20 provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 283 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

Table 20. Code 93 Length 1 Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES

1 Desired Setting 01 Characters 07 Characters 15 Characters 50 Characters

2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

3 Scan SELECT CODE 93 LENGTH 1 SETTING Scan Two Characters From 4 ‘0’ and ‘1’ ‘0’ and ‘7’ ‘1’ and ‘5’ ‘5’ AND ‘0’ Appendix D, Keypad 5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

$CC9L1

Select Code 93 Set Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort ~ and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT 01 = Length 1 is 1 Character

Product Reference Guide 161 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 93 Set Length 2 This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for Code 93 Length Con- trol. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s check, data, and full-ASCII shift characters. The length does not include start/stop characters. The length can be set from 1 to 50 characters. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore this length (only one fixed length). Table 21 provides examples for setting Length 2. See page 284 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

Table 21. CODE 93 Length 2 Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES 00 (Ignore This 1 Desired Setting 07 Characters 15 Characters 50 Characters Length) 2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

3 Scan SELECT CODE 93 LENGTH 2 SETTING

Scan Two Characters From 4 ‘0’ and ‘0’ ‘0’ and ‘7’ ‘1’ and ‘5’ ‘5’ AND ‘0’ Appendix D, Keypad 5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

$CC9L2

Select Code 93 Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort ~ and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT 50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters

162 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Code 93 Quiet Zones Enables/disables quiet zones for Code 93.

$CC9LO02(CR)

Code 93 Quiet Zones = Quiet Zones on two sides

$CC9LO03(CR) DEFAULT

Code 93 Quiet Zones = Small Quiet Zones on two sides

MSI The following options apply to the MSI symbology.

MSI Enable/Disable Enables/Disables ability of reader to decode MSI labels.

$CMSEN00(CR) DEFAULT

MSI = Disable

$CMSEN01(CR)

MSI = Enable

Product Reference Guide 163 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

MSI Check Character Calculation Enables/Disables calculation and verification of an optional MSI check character.

$CMSCC00(CR)

MSI Check Character Calculation = Disable

$CMSCC01(CR) DEFAULT

MSI Check Character Calculation = Enable Mod10

$CMSCC02(CR)

MSI Check Character Calculation = Enable Mod11/10

$CMSCC03(CR)

MSI Check Character Calculation = Enable Mod10/10

MSI Check Character Transmission Enables/disables transmission of an MSI check character.

$CMSCT00(CR)

MSI Check Character Transmission = Disable

$CMSCT01(CR) DEFAULT

MSI Check Character Transmission = Enable

164 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

MSI Length Control This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the MSI symbology.

Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.

Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CMSLC00(CR) DEFAULT

MSI Length Control = Variable Length

$CMSLC01(CR)

MSI = Fixed Length

Product Reference Guide 165 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

MSI Set Length 1 This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for MSI Length Control. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s data characters only. The length can be set from 01 to 50 characters. Table 22 provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 283 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

Table 22. MSI Length 1 Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES

1 Desired Setting 01 Characters 07 Characters 15 Characters 50 Characters

2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

3 Scan SELECT MSI LENGTH 1 SETTING Scan Two Characters From 4 ‘0’ and ‘1’ ‘0’ and ‘7’ ‘1’ and ‘5’ ‘5’ AND ‘0’ Appendix D, Keypad 5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

$CMSL1

Select MSI Set Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort ~ and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT 01 = Length 1 is 1 Character

166 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

MSI Set Length 2 This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for MSI Length Control. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s check, data, and full-ASCII shift characters. The length does not include start/stop characters. The length can be set from 1 to 50 characters. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore this length (only one fixed length). Table 23 provides examples for setting Length 2. See page 284 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

Table 23. MSI Length 2 Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES 00 (Ignore This 1 Desired Setting 07 Characters 15 Characters 50 Characters Length) 2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

3 Scan SELECT MSI LENGTH 2 SETTING

Scan Two Characters From 4 ‘0’ and ‘0’ ‘0’ and ‘7’ ‘1’ and ‘5’ ‘5’ AND ‘0’ Appendix D, Keypad 5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

$CMSL2

Select MSI Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort ~ and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT 50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters

Product Reference Guide 167 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

PLESSEY The following options apply to the Plessey symbology.

Plessey Enable/Disable Enables/Disables ability of reader to decode Plessey labels.

$CPLEN00CR)

DEFAULT Plessey = Disable

$CPLEN01CR)

Plessey = Enable

Plessey Check Character Calculation Enables/Disables calculation and verification of an optional Plessey check character.

$CPLCC00(CR)

Plessey Check Character Calculation = Disable $CPLCC01(CR)

DEFAULT Plessey Check Character Calculation = Enable Plessey std. check char. verification $CPLCC02(CR)

Plessey Check Character Calculation = Enable Anker check char. verification

$CPLCC03(CR)

Plessey Check Character Calculation = Enable Plessey std. and Anker check char verification

168 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Plessey Check Character Transmission Enables/disables transmission of an MSI check character.

$CPLCT00(CR)

Plessey Check Character Transmission = Disable

$CPLCT01(CR) DEFAULT

Plessey Check Character Transmission = Enable

Plessey Length Control This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the Plessey symbology.

Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.

Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CPLLC00(CR) DEFAULT

Plessey Length Control = Variable Length

$CPLLC01(CR)

Plessey = Fixed Length

Product Reference Guide 169 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Plessey Set Length 1 This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for Plessey Length Con- trol. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s data characters only. The length can be set from 01 to 50 characters. Table 24 provides some examples for setting Length 1. See page 283 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

Table 24. Plessey Length 1 Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES

1 Desired Setting 01 Characters 07 Characters 15 Characters 50 Characters

2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

3 Scan SELECT Plessey LENGTH 1 SETTING Scan Two Characters From 4 ‘0’ and ‘1’ ‘0’ and ‘7’ ‘1’ and ‘5’ ‘5’ AND ‘0’ Appendix D, Keypad 5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

$CPLL1

Select Plessey Set Length 1 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort ~ and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT 01 = Length 1 is 1 Character

170 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Plessey Set Length 2 This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for Plessey Length Con- trol. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s check, data, and full-ASCII shift characters. The length does not include start/stop characters. The length can be set from 1 to 50 characters. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore this length (only one fixed length). Table 25 provides examples for setting Length 2. See page 284 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

Table 25. Plessey Length 2 Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES 00 (Ignore This 1 Desired Setting 07 Characters 15 Characters 50 Characters Length) 2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

3 Scan SELECT PLESSEY LENGTH 2 SETTING

Scan Two Characters From 4 ‘0’ and ‘0’ ‘0’ and ‘7’ ‘1’ and ‘5’ ‘5’ AND ‘0’ Appendix D, Keypad 5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

$CPLL2

Select Plessey Length 2 Setting

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort ~ and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT 50 = Length 2 is 50 Characters

Product Reference Guide 171 NOTES

172 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 2D SYMBOLOGIES

2D Global Features

2D Maximum Decoding Time on 2D Normal/Inverse Symbol page 174 Control on page 175 2D Structured Append on page 175

The reader supports the following 2D symbologies (bar code types). Sym- bology-dependent options for each symbology are included in this chapter. See "1D Symbologies" starting on page 81 for configuration of 1D bar codes. Aztec Code on page 176 Micro PDF417 on page 192 China Sensible Code on page 179 QR Code on page 195 Data Matrix on page 182 Micro QR Code on page 197 Maxicode on page 186 UCC Composite on page 200 PDF417 on page 189 Postal Code Selection on page 202

2D Global Features

The following features are common to all, or in some cases, most of the available 2D symbologies. Default settings are indicated at each feature/ option with a green arrow. Also reference Appendix C, Standard Defaults for a listing of the most widely used set of standard factory settings. That section also provides space to record any custom settings needed or imple- mented for your system. To set most features:

1. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING bar code at the top of applicable programming pages.

Complete the programming sequence by scanning the ENTER/EXIT PRO- GRAMMING bar code to exit Programming Mode.

Product Reference Guide 173 Enter/Exit Programming Mode 2D Global Features

2D Maximum Decoding Time This feature specifies the maximum amount of time the software will spend attempting to decode a 2D label. The selectable range is 10 milliseconds to 2.55 milliseconds.

$CDETM0A(CR)

2D Maximum Decoding Time = 100 msec

$CDETM32(CR)

2D Maximum Decoding Time = 200 msec

$CDETM23(CR) DEFAULT

2D Maximum Decoding Time = 350 msec

$CDETM80(CR)

2D Maximum Decoding Time = 500 msec

$CDETM16(CR)

2D Maximum Decoding Time = 1 Second

$CDETMC8(CR)

2D Maximum Decoding Time = 2 Seconds

$CDETMFF(CR)

2D Maximum Decoding Time = 2.55 Seconds

174 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 2D Global Features Enter/Exit Programming Mode

2D Structured Append Enables/disables ability of reader to append multiple 2D Codes labels in a structured format. The structured append property is globally applied to the following symbologies, if these are enabled: • Data Matrix •Aztec •QR Code •PDF 417

$CDESA00(CR) DEFAULT Structured Append = Disable

$CDESA01(CR)

Structured Append = Enable

2D Normal/Inverse Symbol Control Specifies the options available for decoding normal/negative printed 2D symbols. This configuration item applies globally to all the 2D symbologies that support that feature according to Standard AIM Specification: Data Matrix, QR, MicroQR, Aztec and Chinese Sensible Code. To decode all symbologies, including linear symbologies, refer to "Decode Negative Image" on page 78D Symbology Selection

$CIPNR00(CR)

Normal/Inverse Symbol Control = Normal

$CIPNR01(CR)

Normal/Inverse Symbol Control = Inverse

$CIPNR02(CR) DEFAULT Normal/Inverse Symbol Control = Both Normal and Inverse

Product Reference Guide 175 Enter/Exit Programming Mode 2D Global Features

AZTEC CODE

Aztec Code Enable / Disable Enables/disables the ability of the reader to decode Aztec Code labels.

$CAZEN00(CR) DEFAULT

Aztec Code = Disable

$CAZEN01(CR)

Aztec Code = Enable

Aztec Code Length Control This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for this symbology.

Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.

Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CAZLC00(CR) DEFAULT

Aztec Code Length Control = Variable Length

$CAZLC01(CR)

Aztec Code Length Control = Fixed Length

176 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 2D Global Features Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Aztec Code Set Length 1 Specifies one of the bar code lengths for Aztec Code Length Control. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Characters can be set from 0001 to 3,832 characters in increments of 0001 (pad with zeroes). See page 283 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT $CAZL1 PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu- meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad representing your desired character(s). End by scanning Select Aztec Code Length 1 Setting the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~ Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT 0001 = Length 1 is 1 Character

Product Reference Guide 177 Enter/Exit Programming Mode 2D Global Features

Aztec Code Set Length 2 This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for Aztec Code Length Control. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Characters can be set from 0001 to 3,832 characters in increments of 0001 (pad with zeroes). See page 284 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT $CAZL2 PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu- meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad repre- Select Aztec Code Length 2 Setting senting your desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~ Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT Length 2 is 3,832 Characters

178 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 2D Global Features Enter/Exit Programming Mode

CHINA SENSIBLE CODE

China Sensible Code Enable / Disable Enables/disables the ability of the reader to decode China Sensible Code labels.

$CCSEN00(CR) DEFAULT

China Sensible Code = Disable

$CCSEN01(CR)

China Sensible Code = Enable

China Sensible Code Length Control This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for this symbology.

Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.

Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CCSLC00(CR) DEFAULT

China Sensible Code Length Control = Variable Length

$CCSLC01(CR)

China Sensible Code Length Control = Fixed Length

Product Reference Guide 179 Enter/Exit Programming Mode 2D Global Features

China Sensible Code Set Length 1 Specifies one of the bar code lengths for China Sensible Code Length Con- trol. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Characters can be set from 0001 to 7,827 characters in increments of 0001 (pad with zeroes). See page 283 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT $CCSL1 PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu- meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad representing your desired character(s). End by scanning Select China Sensible Code Length 1 Setting the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~ Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT 0001 = Length 1 is 1 Character

180 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 2D Global Features Enter/Exit Programming Mode

China Sensible Code Set Length 2 This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for China Sensible Code Length Control. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Characters can be set from 0001 to 7,827 characters in increments of 0001 (pad with zeroes). See page 284 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

$CCSL2 To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu- meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad repre- Select China Sensible Code Length 2 Setting senting your desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~ Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT Length 2 is 7,827 Characters

Product Reference Guide 181 Enter/Exit Programming Mode 2D Global Features

DATA MATRIX

Data Matrix Enable / Disable Enables/disables ability of reader to decode Data Matrix labels.

$CDMEN00(CR)

Data Matrix = Disable

$CDMEN01(CR) DEFAULT

Data Matrix = Enable

Data Matrix Square/Rectangular Style Specifies the options available when reading Data Matrix with different form factors. Choices are: •Square Style •Rectangular Style • Both Square and Rectangular Style The configuration item can also be configured as a bit mask to filter one or more Data Matrix labels with different symbol size AND shape styles.

$CDMDM3FFF0BDF)

Data Matrix Dimensions Mask = Square Style $CDMDM0000420

Data Matrix Dimensions Mask = Rectangular Style $CDMD03FFFFFF

DEFAULT Data Matrix Dimensions Mask = Both Square and Rectangular Style

182 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 2D Global Features Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Data Matrix DPM Decoding Safety This feature defines the tolerance of DPM decoding software to operate with poor quality labels. Decoding Safety is used to configure a barcode symbology decoder to be very aggressive to very conservative depending on a particular customer’s needs. Higher tolerance to poor quality labels increases the reading capability of the scanner. See page 283 for more information on this feature.

This feature is valid for the PD9530-DPM model only.

$CDMDA01(CR) DEFAULT

Data Matrix Decoding Safety = 1 (Aggressive)

$CDMDA02(CR)

Data Matrix Decoding Safety = 2

$CDMDA03(CR)

Data Matrix Decoding Safety = 3

$CDMDA04(CR)

Data Matrix Decoding Safety = 4

$CDMDA05(CR)

Data Matrix Decoding Safety = 5 (Conservative)

Product Reference Guide 183 Enter/Exit Programming Mode 2D Global Features

Data Matrix Length Control This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for this symbology.

Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.

Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CDMLC00(CR) DEFAULT

Data Matrix Length Control = Variable Length

$CDMLC01(CR)

Data Matrix Length Control = Fixed Length

Data Matrix Set Length 1 Specifies one of the bar code lengths for Data Matrix Length Control. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Characters can be set from 0001 to 3,116 characters in increments of 0001 (pad with zeroes). See page 283 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT $CDML1 PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu- meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad representing your desired character(s). End by scanning Select Data Matrix Length 1 Setting the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~ Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT 0001 = Length 1 is 1 Character

184 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 2D Global Features Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Data Matrix Set Length 2 This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for Data Matrix Length Control. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Characters can be set from 0001 to 3,116 characters in increments of 0001 (pad with zeroes). See page 284 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

$CDML2 To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu- meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad repre- Select Data Matrix Length 2 Setting senting your desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~ Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT Length 2 is 3,116 Characters

Product Reference Guide 185 Enter/Exit Programming Mode 2D Global Features

MAXICODE

Maxicode Enable / Disable Enables/disables ability of reader to decode Maxicode labels.

$CMXEN00(CR) DEFAULT

Maxicode = Disable

$CMXEN01(CR)

Maxicode = Enable

Maxicode Primary Message Transmission Enables/disables the transmission of only the Primary Message when the Secondary Message is not readable.

$CMXPT00(CR) DEFAULT

Maxicode Primary Message Transmission = Disable

$CMXPT01(CR)

Maxicode Primary Message Transmission = Enable

186 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 2D Global Features Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Maxicode Length Control This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for this symbology.

Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.

Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CMXLC00(CR) DEFAULT

Maxicode Length Control = Variable Length

$CMXLC01(CR)

Maxicode Length Control = Fixed Length Maxicode Set Length 1 Specifies one of the bar code lengths for Maxicode Length Control. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Characters can be set from 0001 to 0145 characters in increments of 0001 (pad with zeroes). See page 283 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT $CMXL1 PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu- meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad representing your desired character(s). End by scanning Select Maxicode Length 1 Setting the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~ Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT 0001 = Length 1 is 1 Character

Product Reference Guide 187 Enter/Exit Programming Mode 2D Global Features

Maxicode Set Length 2 This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for Maxicode Length Con- trol. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Characters can be set from 0001 to 0145 characters in increments of 0001 (pad with zeroes). See page 284 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

$CMXL2 To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu- meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad repre- Select Maxicode Length 2 Setting senting your desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~ Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT Length 2 is 0145 Characters

188 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 2D Global Features Enter/Exit Programming Mode

PDF417

PDF417 Enable / Disable Enables/disables the ability of the reader to decode PDF417 labels.

$CP4EN00(CR)

PDF417 = Disable

$CP4EN01(CR) DEFAULT

PDF417 = Enable

PDF417 Length Control This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for this symbology.

Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.

Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CP4LC00(CR) DEFAULT

PDF417 Length Control = Variable Length

$CP4LC01(CR)

PDF417 Length Control = Fixed Length

Product Reference Guide 189 Enter/Exit Programming Mode 2D Global Features

PDF417 Set Length 1 Specifies one of the bar code lengths for PDF417 Length Control. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s data characters only. Characters can be set from 0001 to 2,710 characters (pad with zeroes) in increments of 01. Any value greater than 2,710 will be considered to be 2,710. See page 283 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT $CP4L1 PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu- meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad representing your desired character(s). End by scanning Select PDF417 Length 1 Setting the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~ Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT 0001 = Length 1 is 1 Character

190 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 2D Global Features Enter/Exit Programming Mode

PDF417 Set Length 2 This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for PDF417 Length Con- trol. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s check, data, and full-ASCII shift characters. The length does not include start/stop characters. Characters can be set from 01 to 2,710 characters (pad with zeroes) in increments of 01. Any value greater than 2,710 will be considered to be 2,710. See page 284 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT $CP4L2 PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu- meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad repre- Select PDF417 Length 2 Setting senting your desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~ Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT Length 2 is 2,710 Characters

Product Reference Guide 191 Enter/Exit Programming Mode 2D Global Features

MICRO PDF417

Micro PDF417 Enable / Disable Enables/disables the ability of the reader to decode Micro PDF417 labels.

$CMIEN00(CR) DEFAULT

Micro PDF417 = Disable

$CMIEN01(CR)

Micro PDF417 = Enable

Micro PDF417 Code 128 GS1-128 Emulation Specifies which AIM ID to use for MicroPDF labels when doing Code 128 or GS1-128 emulation. Emulation choices are: • Micro PDF AIM ID and label type • Code 128 / EAN128 AIM Id and label type

$CMIU800(CR) DEFAULT

Micro PDF417 Code 128 GS1-128 Emulation = Micro PDF AIM ID and label type

$CMIU801(CR)

Micro PDF417 Code 128 GS1-128 Emulation = Code 128 / EAN128 AIM ID and label type

192 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 2D Global Features Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Micro PDF417 Length Control This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for this symbology.

Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.

Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CMILC00(CR) DEFAULT

Micro PDF417 Length Control = Variable Length

$CMILC01(CR)

Micro PDF417 Length Control = Fixed Length

Micro PDF417 Set Length 1 Specifies one of the bar code lengths for Micro PDF417 Length Control. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s data characters only. Characters can be set from 0001 to 0366 characters (pad with zeroes) in increments of 01. Any value greater than 0366 will be considered to be 0366. See page 283 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

$CMIL1 To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu- meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad repre- Select Micro PDF417 Length 1 Setting senting your desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~ Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT 0001 = Length 1 is 1 Character

Product Reference Guide 193 Enter/Exit Programming Mode 2D Global Features

Micro PDF417 Set Length 2 This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for Micro PDF417 Length Control. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length includes the bar code’s data characters only. Characters can be set from 0001 to 0366 characters (pad with zeroes) in increments of 01. Any value greater than 0366 will be considered to be 0366. See page 284 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

$CMIL2 To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu- meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad repre- Select Micro PDF417 Length 2 Setting senting your desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~ Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT Length 2 is 0366 Characters

194 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 2D Global Features Enter/Exit Programming Mode

QR CODE

QR Code Enable / Disable Enables/disables the ability of the reader to decode QR Code labels.

$CQREN00(CR)

QR Code = Disable

$CQREN01(CR) DEFAULT

QR Code = Enable

QR Code Length Control This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for this symbology.

Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.

Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CQRLC00(CR) DEFAULT QR Code Length Control = Variable Length

$CQRLC01(CR)

QR Code Length Control = Fixed Length

Product Reference Guide 195 Enter/Exit Programming Mode 2D Global Features

QR Code Set Length 1 Specifies one of the bar code lengths for QR Code Length Control. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Characters can be set from 0001 to 7,089 characters in increments of 0001 (pad with zeroes). See page 283 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

$CQRL1 To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu- meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad repre- Select QR Code Length 1 Setting senting your desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~ Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT 0001 = Length 1 is 1 Character

196 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 2D Global Features Enter/Exit Programming Mode

QR Code Set Length 2 This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for QR Code Length Con- trol. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Characters can be set from 0001 to 7,089 characters in increments of 0001 (pad with zeroes). See page 284 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT $CQRL2 PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu- meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad repre- Select QR Code Length 2 Setting senting your desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~ Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT Length 2 is 7,089 Characters

MICRO QR CODE

Micro QR Code Enable/Disable Enables/disables the ability of the reader to decode Micro QR Code labels.

MQEN00

DEFAULT

Micro QR Code = Disable

MQEN01

Micro QR Code = Enable

Product Reference Guide 197 Enter/Exit Programming Mode 2D Global Features

Micro QR Code Length Control This feature specifies either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for this symbology.

Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.

Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set.

$CMQLC00(CR)

DEFAULT

Micro QR Code Length Control = Variable Length

$CMQLC01(CR)

Micro QR Code Length Control = Fixed Length

Micro QR Code Set Length 1 Specifies one of the bar code lengths for Micro QR Code Length Control. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Characters can be set from 0001 to 0035 characters in increments of 0001 (pad with zeroes). See page 283 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT

$CMQL1

PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar

code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-

meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad repre- Select Micro QR Code Length 1 Setting senting your desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~ Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT 0001 = Length 1 is 1 Character

198 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 2D Global Features Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Micro QR Code Set Length 2 This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for Micro QR Code Length Control. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Characters can be set from 0001 to 0035 characters in increments of 0001 (pad with zeroes). See page 284 for detailed instructions on setting this feature.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT

$CMQL2

PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar

code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanu-

meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad repre- Select QR Code Length 2 Setting senting your desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~ Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT Length 2 is 0035 Characters

Product Reference Guide 199 Enter/Exit Programming Mode 2D Global Features

UCC COMPOSITE

UCC Composite Enable / Disable Enables/disables the ability of the reader to decode the stacked part of a UCC Composite label.

This feature is not effective when Global AIM IDs are enabled (see "Global AIM ID" on page 51).

$CCMEN00(CR) DEFAULT

UCC Composite = Disable

$CCMEN01(CR)

UCC Composite = Enable

200 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 2D Global Features Enter/Exit Programming Mode

UCC Optional Composite Timer Specifies the amount of time the system will wait for the stacked part of a UCC Composite label before transmitting the linear label without an add- on.

$CCMOT00(CR) DEFAULT

UCC Optional Composite Timer = Timer Disabled

$CCMOT01(CR)

UCC Optional Composite Timer = 100msec

$CCMOT02(CR)

UCC Optional Composite Timer = 200msec

$CCMOT03(CR)

UCC Optional Composite Timer = 300msec

$CCMOT04(CR)

UCC Optional Composite Timer = 400msec

$CCMOT05(CR)

UCC Optional Composite Timer = 500msec

Product Reference Guide 201 Enter/Exit Programming Mode 2D Global Features

POSTAL CODE SELECTION Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode labels of a specific postal symbology.

$CPOEN00(CR)

DEFAULT Postal Code Selection = Disable All Postal Codes

$CPOEN01(CR)

Postal Code Selection = Enable Postnet $CPOEN02(CR)

Postal Code Selection = Enable Planet

$CPOEN03(CR)

Postal Code Selection = Enable Royal Mail $CPOEN04(CR)

Postal Code Selection = Enable Kix

$CPOEN05(CR)

Postal Code Selection = Enable Australia Post

202 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 2D Global Features Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Postal Code Selection (continued)

$CPOEN06(CR)

Postal Code Selection = Enable Japan Post

$CPOEN07(CR)

Postal Code Selection = Enable IMB $CPOEN08(CR)

Postal Code Selection = Enable Sweden Post

$CPOEN09(CR)

Postal Code Selection = Enable Portugal Post

Postnet BB Control Controls the ability of the scanner to decode B and B' fields of Postnet labels.

$CPOBB00(CR) DEFAULT

Postnet BB Control = Disable

$CPOBB01(CR)

Postnet BB Control = Enable

Product Reference Guide 203 NOTES

204 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 MOTION FEATURES

MOTION AIMING CONTROL on page 205

MOTION SENSITIVITY on page 206

MOTIONLESS TIMEOUT on page 206

Use this chapter to configure motion settings for the handheld. Reference Appendix C, for a listing of standard factory settings.

Motion Aiming Control Configures the ability of the scanner to Enable/Disable the Aiming system when motion is detected.

$CMOMD00(CR)

Motion Aiming Control = Disable

$CMOMD01(CR) DEFAULT

Motion Aiming Control = Enable

Product Reference Guide 205 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Motion Sensitivity Defines discrete set of levels for scanner motion sensitivity when in handheld use.

$CMOSY00(CR)

Motion Sensitivity = Low $CMOSY01(CR) DEFAULT Motion Sensitivity = Medium

$CMOSY02(CR)

Motion Sensitivity = High

Motionless Timeout Specifies the waiting time in 100 millisecond ticks to assume that the reader is in a motionless condition. The selectable range is 500 msec to 25.5 Sec- onds. When no motion event is detected for a period of time longer than this timeout, the software assumes the reader is in a motionless condition. This option relates to such features as Aimer On and Stand Mode Object Sense scanning with respect to motion. See " Motionless Timeout" on page 303 in References.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT

$CMOTO

PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar

code at left followed by three digits from the Alpha-

numeric characters in rep- Appendix D, Keypad resenting your desired character(s). End by scanning Select Motionless Timeout Setting the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort ~ and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT 020 = Motionless Timeout = 2 seconds

206 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 WIRELESS FEATURES

This section provides options and programming related to the reader’s wireless communication features. Reference Appendix C, for a listing of standard factory settings.

WIRELESS BEEPER FEATURES starting on page 210 •"Good Transmission Beep" on page 210 •"Beep Frequency" on page 210 •"Beep Duration" on page 211 •"Beep Volume" on page 212 •"Disconnect Beep" on page 212 •"Docking Beep" on page 213 •"Leash Alarm" on page 213 CONFIGURATION UPDATES starting on page 215 •Automatic Configuration Update on page 215 •Copy Configuration to Scanner on page 215 •Copy Configuration to Base Station on page 215 BATCH FEATURES starting on page 216 •Batch Mode on page 216 •Send Batch on page 216 •Erase Batch Memory on page 217 •RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay on page 217

DIRECT RADIO AUTOLINK starting on page 218

RF ADDRESS STAMPING starting on page 218 •Source Radio Address Transmission on page 218 •Source Radio Address Delimiter Character on page 219 REAL TIME CLOCK (RTC) CONFIGURATION starting on page 220 •Current Date on page 220 •Current Time on page 220 •Date Tx Format on page 221 •Time Tx Format on page 221 •Date-Time Separator on page 222 •Date-Time Transmission Order on page 223 •Power Off on page 224 •Powerdown Timeout on page 224

Product Reference Guide 207 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

PBT9500-Only Features

BLUETOOTH SECURITY FEATURES starting on page 225 •Bluetooth Security Mode on page 226 •Bluetooth PIN Code on page 226 •Select PIN Code Length on page 226 •Set PIN Code on page 227 OTHER BLUETOOTH FEATURES starting on page 228 •Reconnect Attempt Interval on page 228 •Bluetooth HID Variable PIN Code on page 229 •Bluetooth HID Alt Mode on page 230 •Bluetooth HID Send Unknown ASCII Char on page 230 •Bluetooth Max Client on page 231 •Bluetooth Friendly Name on page 232 •Bluetooth Reconnect Attempt Mode on page 232 •Power Class on page 233 •HID Country Mode on page 233 PM9500-Only Features

•STAR Radio Protocol Timeout on page 236 •STAR Radio Transmit Mode on page 237 •Changing System Speed on page 238 •Frequency Agility on page 238 COMPATIBILITY WITH PM8500 starting on page 240 •Compatibility Mode on page 240 •Changing from Normal to Compatible Mode on page 240 •Changing from Compatible Mode back to Normal on page 241 •Base Address Stamping on page 242 •Base Address Delimiter Character on page 242 •RS-485 Master Header/Terminator ( Prefix/Suffix) on page 243 •RS-485 Cradle Address on page 243 •RS-485 Slave Minimum Address on page 244 •RS-485 Slave Maximum Address on page 244 •RS-485 Network Working Mode on page 245 •RS-485 Network Warning Message on page 245 •RS-485 Transmission Warning Message on page 246 •RS-485 Network Baud Rate on page 246

208 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Display and Keyboard Features

•Display Operating Mode on page 247 •Display Off Timeout on page 248 •Backlight Enable on page 248 •Display Contrast on page 249 •Font Size on page 249 •Enable/disable buttons on page 250 •Arrow Keys Mode (4-key models only) on page 251 •Arrow Up String (4-key models only) on page 251 •Arrow Down String (4-key models only) on page 252 •Action Configuration for Function Keys on page 254 •Define Strings on page 257 •Set String ID on page 258 •Set String Header on page 258 •Set String Terminator on page 259 ADDITIONAL FEATURES FOR 16-KEY MODELS starting on page 260 •Last Code Shown Timeout on page 260 •Display Time Stamping Mode on page 260 •Mode Selection on page 261 •Quantity Field on page 261 •Quantity/Code Send Mode on page 262 •Quantity/Code Separator on page 262 •Interkey Timeout on page 263 •Append Code on page 264 •Echo on page 265 •Keypress Sound on page 265 •SHIFT Enable/Disable on page 266 •SHIFT key association on page 266 •Lower Case on page 267 •Set Function Key Labels on page 267 •Barcode/Key Different Data Format on page 269 •Set Barcode Header on page 269 •Set Barcode Terminator on page 269 •Set Key Sequence ID on page 270 •Set Key Sequence Header on page 270 •Set Key Sequence Terminator on page 270

Product Reference Guide 209 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

WIRELESS BEEPER FEATURES Several options are available to configure beeper behavior for RF operation.

Good Transmission Beep Enables/disables the Good Transmission Beep indication. When enabled, a beep occurs when a Label is correctly transmitted to the base.

$CBTAB00(CR)

Good Transmission Beep = Disable

$CBTAB01(CR) DEFAULT

Good Transmission Beep = Enable

Beep Frequency Adjusts radio-specific beep indications to sound at a low, medium or high frequency, selectable from the list below (controls the beeper’s pitch/tone).

$CBTBF00(CR) DEFAULT

Beep Frequency = Low

$CBTBF01(CR)

Beep Frequency = Medium

$CBTBF02(CR)

Beep Frequency = High

210 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Beep Duration This feature controls the duration of radio-specific beep indications.

$CBTBD06(CR)

Beep Duration = 60 msec

$CBTBD08(CR)

DEFAULT Beep Duration = 80 msec

$CBTBD0A(CR)

Beep Duration = 100 msec

$CBTBD0C(CR)

Beep Duration = 120 msec

$CBTBD0E(CR)

Beep Duration = 140 msec

$CBTBD10(CR)

Beep Duration = 160 msec

$CBTBD12(CR)

Beep Duration = 180 msec

$CBTBD14(CR)

Beep Duration = 200 msec

Product Reference Guide 211 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Beep Volume Selects the beeper volume (loudness) of radio-specific beep indications. There are three selectable volume levels.

$CBTBV00(CR)

Beep Volume = Low

$CBTBV01(CR)

Beep Volume = Medium

$CBTBV02(CR) DEFAULT

Beep Volume = High

Disconnect Beep Enables/disables the beep indication that a handheld has become connected or disconnected from a Base Station.

The defaults are different for the STAR and Bluetooth models.

$CBTDB00(CR)

Disconnect Beep = Disable

$CBTDB01(CR) DEFAULT

Disconnect Beep = Enable

212 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Docking Beep Enables/disables a beep indication when the handheld is placed in the Base Station.

$CBTCB00(CR)

Docking Beep = Disable

$CBTCB01(CR) DEFAULT

Docking Beep = Enable

Leash Alarm This setting specifies the number of seconds to sound the Leash Mode beeps (three per second) when the handheld goes out of range. This is especially useful in instances where the reader might inadvertently have been placed in a bag or cart. For this mode to be effective, the reader must be linked to the Base Station. If the reader is asleep or disconnected from the Base Station, there is no way for it to know where it is relative to the Base Station because communication is not active between the devices.

$CBTLB00(CR) DEFAULT

Leash Alarm = Disabled

$CBTLB01(CR)

Leash Alarm = 1 Second

$CBTLB02(CR)

Leash Alarm = 2 Seconds

Product Reference Guide 213 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Leash Alarm (continued)

$CBTLB03(CR)

Leash Alarm = 3 Seconds

$CBTLB04(CR)

$CCpyCfg2HH Leash Alarm = 4 Seconds

$CBTLB05(CR)

Leash Alarm = 5 Seconds

$CBTLB0A(CR)

Leash Alarm = 10 Seconds

$CBTLB19(CR)

Leash Alarm = 25 Seconds

$CBTLB1E(CR)

Leash Alarm = 30 Seconds

214 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

CONFIGURATION UPDATES See page 304 in “References” for detailed information and examples of these features. Automatic Configuration Update When this feature is enabled, a reader and its linked Base Station can automatically ensure they stay in sync with regard to application hardware and/ or configuration. See page 304 for more information on this feature.

$CBTCU00(CR)

Automatic Configuration Update = Disable

$CBTCU01(CR) DEFAULT Automatic Configuration Update = Enable

Copy Configuration to Scanner Scan the following label to copy the current Base Station configuration to the scanner. Use this method when the Auto Configuration Update feature is disabled and you want a one-time configuration update to be performed on the scanner.

Do not scan an ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE label with this bar code.

CpyCfg2HH

Copy Configuration to Scanner Copy Configuration to Base Station Scan the following label to copy the current scanner configuration to the Base Station. Use this method when the Auto Configuration Update feature is disabled and you want a one-time configuration update to be performed on the Base Station. Cpycfg2Ba

Copy Configuration to Base Station

Do not scan an ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE label with this bar code.

Product Reference Guide 215 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

BATCH FEATURES

Batch Mode This option specifies whether to store labels in the handheld while disconnected from the base. Options are as follows: • Disabled — The handheld will not store/batch labels. • Automatic — The handheld will store labels to RAM when the handheld goes out of range and is disconnected from the remote device. • Manual — The handheld will always store labels to Flash memory. The user must manually send the stored labels to the remote device using a special "batch send" label.

$CBTBM00(CR) DEFAULT Batch Mode = Disabled

$CBTBM01(CR)

Batch Mode = Automatic

$CBTBM02(CR)

Batch Mode = Manual

Send Batch When the scanner is configured in Manual Batch Mode, use the following bar code to initiate sending of labels stored in batch memory.

Do not scan an ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE label in conjunc- tion with this bar code.

BatchSend

Send Batch

216 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Erase Batch Memory When the scanner is configured in Manual Batch Mode, use the following bar code to erase any labels stored in batch memory.

Do not scan an ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE label in conjunc- tion with this bar code.

BatchClear

Erase Batch Memory

RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay Specifies the delay in 10 msec increments between transmitting labels stored in batch memory.

$CBTTD00(CR) DEFAULT RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay = No Delay

$CBTTD05(CR)

RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay = 50 mS

$CBTTD0A(CR)

RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay = 100 mS

$CBTTD32(CR)

RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay = 0.5 seconds

$CBTTD64(CR)

RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay = 1 second

$CBTTDFA(CR)

RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay = 2.5 seconds

Product Reference Guide 217 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

DIRECT RADIO AUTOLINK This feature enables/disables the ability to link a wireless handheld to a base station without scanning the Unlink label first.

$CBTDL00(CR) DEFAULT Direct Radio Link = Unlink Label Required

$CBTDL01(CR)

Direct Radio Link = Automatic Unlinking

RF ADDRESS STAMPING These features allow configuration of source radio data inclusion. Source Radio Address Transmission Enables/disables the ability of source radio address information to be transmitted to the host and, if so, at what position with respect to the label data. See page 304 in “References” for detailed information and examples for setting this feature. When included as a prefix, the source-radio ID is displayed after all label formatting has been applied. The 6 byte hex address is sent as 12 ascii characters, i.e., an address of 00 06 66 00 1A ED will be sent as (shown in hex): 30 30 30 36 36 36 30 30 31 41 45 44

$CBTAS00(CR) DEFAULT Source Radio Address Transmission = Do Not Include

$CBTAS01(CR)

Source Radio Address Transmission = Prefix

218 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Source Radio Address Delimiter Character This option specifies the delimiter character to be placed between the label data and radio address when address stamping is enabled.

This feature only applies if "Source Radio Address Transmis- sion" on page 218 is enabled.

$CBTAD To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO- GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric characters in representing your Set Source Radio Address Delimiter Character Appendix D, Keypad desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~ Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT 00 = No Delimiter Character

Product Reference Guide 219 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

REAL TIME CLOCK (RTC) CONFIGURATION

Current Date Sets the date of the internal Real Time Clock (RTC)

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO- GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at $CDYMD left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric characters in Appendix D, Keypad representing your desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT Set Current Date = YYMMDD bar code again.

~ Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

Current Time Sets the time of the internal Real Time Clock (RTC). HH = 24 hours format

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO- GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at $CTHMS left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric characters in Appendix D, Keypad representing your desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT Set Current Time = HHMMSS bar code again.

~ Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

220 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Date Tx Format Sets the format of the date.

$CDTXF00\r DEFAULT

YYYY-MM-DD (ISO 8601)

$CDTXF01\r

YYYYMMDD (No ISO)

$CDTXF02\r

MMDDYYYY

$CDTXF03\r

DDMMYYYY

Time Tx Format Sets the format of the time.

$CTTXF00\r DEFAULT

hh:mm:ss (ISO 8601)

$CTTXF01\r

hhmmss (No ISO)

Product Reference Guide 221 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Date-Time Separator Sets the character used to separate Date and Time from the next field in message.

$CRFTD0000\r DEFAULT Disable Date-Time Separator To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO- GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at $CRFTD01\r left followed by 2 digits from the Alphanumeric characters in Appendix D, Keypad representing your desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT Set Character Separator = bar code again.

~ Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

222 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Date-Time Transmission Order Allows the selection of the order of date and time transmission.

$CRFTS00\r

DEFAULT Disabled

$CRFTS01\r

ISO 8601: Date'T'Time

$CRFTS02\r

DateTime

$CRFTS03\r

TimeDate

$CRFTS04\r

Date

$CRFTS05\r

Time

Product Reference Guide 223 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Power Off See “Power Off” on page 20 for information about this feature.

Powerdown Timeout The Powerdown Timeout feature sets the time for automatically switching the unit off when the imager has been idle.

$CSLPS00(CR)

Powerdown Timeout = Disable

$CSLPS01(CR)

Powerdown Timeout = 10 minutes

$CSLPS02(CR)

Powerdown Timeout = 20 minutes

R)$CSLPS03(CR

)

DEFAULTDEFAULT Powerdown Timeout = 30 minutes

$CSLPS06(CR)

Powerdown Timeout = 60 Minutes (1 Hour)

$CSLPS0C(CR)

Powerdown Timeout = 120 Minutes (2 Hours)

224 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode PBT9500-ONLY FEATURES The features in this section are valid only for PBT9500 Bluetooth models. Also reference the Setup section for instructions on "Linking the Reader," starting on page 19.

BLUETOOTH SECURITY FEATURES On the Bluetooth system, it is possible to set a (configurable) PIN code to authenticate/connect Bluetooth devices, and encrypt the data. The Bluetooth PIN code can be enabled and configured by reading the bar codes in the following sections. If you are using a Bluetooth scanner directly connected to a host through a Bluetooth dongle, verify that the scanner and the Bluetooth driver used by the dongle share the same PIN code and the same security level. Otherwise the connection cannot be established.

Follow these steps to set the PIN code for a scanner:

1. Enable Bluetooth Security Mode by scanning the “Enable” bar code below.

2. Select a PIN code length of either 4 or 16 characters by scanning the appropriate bar code in "Select PIN Code Length" on page 226.

3. Scan the relevant bar code from "Set PIN Code" on page 227, then scan the desired alphanumeric characters from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad to set the PIN code. See page 306 in “References” for more detailed information and examples for this feature.

Product Reference Guide 225 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Bluetooth Security Mode This feature enables/disables authentication and encryption of the Blue- tooth link. Use the feature "Bluetooth PIN Code" on page 226 to specify the length and digits in the PIN code used to authenticate the Bluetooth Link. Changing the security mode setting will unlink the devices. If the Automatic Configuration Update is set to the default “Enabled” setting, the devices must only be relinked. If the Automatic Configuration Update is set to “Disabled,” the Security Mode setting must also be updated in the Base Station using Aladdin. After the Base Station has been updated, the devices must be relinked.

$CBTSE00(CR) DEFAULT

Bluetooth Security Mode = Disable

$CBTSE01(CR)

Bluetooth Security Mode = Enable

Bluetooth PIN Code After enabling Security Mode (see "Bluetooth Security Mode" on page 226), specify whether you want to set a 4-digit or a 16-digit PIN Code. See page 306 for detailed information and examples for setting this feature.

Select PIN Code Length

$CBTPS00\r

DEFAULT Select 4-character Bluetooth PIN Code

~$CBTPS01\r

Select 16-character Bluetooth PIN Code

226 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Set PIN Code Determine the desired characters for the PIN code, then convert to hexadecimal using the ASCII Chart on page 1 on the inside back cover of this manual. See page 306 for detailed information and examples for setting this feature.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO- $CBTPC

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at

left followed by the hexadecimal digits from the Alpha-

numeric characters in Appendix D, Keypad repre- Set 4-character Bluetooth PIN Code senting your desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

$CBTP6

Set 16-character Bluetooth PIN Code

~ Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT 31323334 = Default PIN Code is 1234

Product Reference Guide 227 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

OTHER BLUETOOTH FEATURES

Reconnect Attempt Interval This feature specifies the interval time between reconnection attempts.

$CBTRI01(CR) DEFAULT

1 minute

$CBTRI02(CR)

5 minutes

$CBTRI03(CR)

30 minutes

$CBTRI00(CR)

Indefinitely

228 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Bluetooth HID Variable PIN Code Specifies the selection available for Static or Variable Pin Code, when Blue- tooth HID profile is configured. Some Bluetooth drivers on the Host (such as WIDCOMM and BlueSoleil 8) require a Variable PIN Code. When attempting connection, the application presents a window that includes a PIN Code which is to be input using the PowerScan BT9500. Scan the bar code "Variable PIN Code" below, then use the host computer’s Bluetooth manager to “Discover new devices” and select "Datalogic Scanner." Use a text editor to see incoming data on the port designated by the computer's Bluetooth manager.

If you receive an error message, it may be necessary to disable security on the device.

When you hear the beep and see the Green LED blinking indicating the reader is waiting for an alphanumeric entry, enter the required variable PIN Code by scanning the corresponding bar codes in Appendix D, Keypad for alphanumeric entry. Finish by scanning the Exit HID Variable PIN Code label.

$CBTHP00

DEFAULTDEFAULT Set Static Pin Code

$CBTHP01

Set Variable Pin code

~ Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

Exit HID Variable PIN Code

Product Reference Guide 229 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Bluetooth HID Alt Mode Enable/Disable the ability to correctly transmit a label to the host regardless of the Bluetooth HID Country Mode selected, when Bluetooth HID Profile is configured. Read the configuration command label below for the HID Alt Mode feature.

DEFAULTDEFAULT

HID Alt Mode = OFF

HID Alt Mode = ON

Bluetooth HID Send Unknown ASCII Char Unknown characters are characters the host does not recognize. When Dis- able HID Send ASCII Unknown character is selected, all barcode data is sent except for unknown characters, and an error beep will sound. When HID Send Unknown ASCII character is enabled, an unknown character will be sent as a SPACE.

$CBTHO00(CR

DEFAULT HID Send Unknown ASCII character = Disable

CBTHO01(CR

HID Send Unknown ASCII character = Enable

230 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Bluetooth Max Client

Set the number of Readers that can connect to the Base in a Piconet network.

$CBTMS01(CR)

Bluetooth Max Client = 1

$CBTMS02(CR)

DEFAULT Bluetooth Max Client = 2

$CBTMS03(CR)

Bluetooth Max Client = 3

$CBTMS04(CR)

Bluetooth Max Client = 4

$CBTMS05(CR)

Bluetooth Max Client = 5

$CBTMS06(CR)

Bluetooth Max Client = 6

$CBTMS07(CR)

Bluetooth Max Client = 7

Product Reference Guide 231 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Bluetooth Friendly Name You can set a meaningful name for PowerScan BT9500 that will appear in the application during device discovery. To set a new Bluetooth Friendly Name, scan the barcode below and follow the instructions.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO- $CBTFN GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by a maximum 64 digits from the Alphanumeric characters in Appendix D, Keypad. The digits must be the hexadecimal ASCII representa- Set Bluetooth Friendly Name tion of the desired characters. If less than the expected string of 32 characters are selected, scan the ENTER/ EXIT bar code to terminate the string.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort ~ and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

POWERSCAN BT9500 DEFAULT [SERIAL_NUMBER_SCANNER]

Bluetooth Reconnect Attempt Mode Enable/Disable reconnection by trigger pull.

$CBTRM00(CR)

Bluetooth Reconnect Attempt Mode = Disable

$CBTRM01(

DEFAULT Bluetooth Reconnect Attempt Mode = Enable

232 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Power Class

$CBTPP00(CR)

DEFAULT

Power Class 1

$CBTPP01(C

Power Class 2

HID Country Mode When the Reader is connected with a Bluetooth Adapter in HID mode, you may want to set the country for which your PC is localized. In order to do that, read one of the configuration command labels below.

Country Mode = U.S.

Country Mode = Belgium

Country Mode = Britain

Country Mode = Croatia

Product Reference Guide 233 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

HID Country Mode (continued)

Country Mode = Czech Republic

Country Mode = Denmark

Country Mode = France

Country Mode = French Canadian

Country Mode = Germany

Country Mode = Hungary

Country Mode = Italy

Country Mode = Japanese 106-key

Country Mode = Lithuanian

234 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

HID Country Mode (continued)

Country Mode = Norway

Country Mode = Poland

Country Mode = Portugal

Country Mode = Romania

Country Mode = Spain

Country Mode = Sweden

Country Mode = Slovakia

Country Mode = Switzerland

Product Reference Guide 235 Enter/Exit Programming Mode PM9500-ONLY FEATURES

The features in this section are valid only for the PowerScan PM9500 Star model: • STAR Radio Protocol Timeout on page 236 • STAR Radio Transmit Mode on page 237

STAR Radio Protocol Timeout This parameter sets the valid wait time before transmission between the handheld reader and Base Station is considered failed. When setting this parameter, take into consideration the radio traffic (number of readers in the same area). The selectable range for this feature is from 02 to 25 seconds. See page 305 in “References” for detailed information and examples for setting this feature.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO-

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code

at left followed by two digits from the Alphanumeric

characters in representing Appendix D, Keypad your desired character(s). End by scanning the Set Radio Protocol Timeout ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL barcode to abort ~ and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT 02 = 2 Seconds Radio Protocol Timeout

236 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

STAR Radio Transmit Mode Specifies the transmission protocol for Star communications. Options are: • ACK from cradle to scanner — signals a good transmission as soon as the Base Station receives a label • ACK when sent to host — scanner signals a good transmission as soon as the Base Station has sent the label to the host • ACK from host — scanner signals a good transmission as soon as the Base Station has sent the label to the host and host has replied with an acknowledge message.

DEFAULT

ACK from cradle

ACK when sent to host

ACK from host

ACK from host works only for RS-232 or USB-COM interfaces with ACK/NACK disabled. If ACK from host is configured with any other interface conditions, it works like ACK when sent to host. See "Message Formatting" on page 309 for details. For this feature to be operational, the scanner must be set to Ignore Host Commands (see page 23).

The Base Station can receive a host message only if Host Com- mands Obey/Ignore (page 23) is set to Ignore.

Product Reference Guide 237 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Changing System Speed

1. Link the PM9500 with a BC9xxx Base.

2. With the PM9500, read a “Compatible Mode/Normal Mode Speed” programming label on page 240 to set “Low, Medium, or High Speed”.

3. Place the PM9500 into the BC9xxx.

The Reader and Base will now be linked at the new programmed speed.

This feature can also be programmed using Datalogic Aladdin.

1. On the BC9xxx Base, change the Compatible mode parameter to low, intermediate, or high speed through Aladdin.

2. Place an unlinked PM9500 onto the BC9xxx base.

The Reader and base will link at the new programmed speed.

Frequency Agility In exceptionally noisy environments or in case of a high concentration of radio devices, Star system performance may be improved by configuring Frequency Agility. Frequency Agility parameters change the way the radio frequencies are used in a Star communication system. As when changing the System Speed, use the following procedure:

1. Link the PM9500 with a BC9xxx Base.

2. With the PM9500, read one of the “Frequency Agility” programming labels below.

3. Place the PM9500 into the BC9xxx. Reader and Base will then be linked and the new frequencies handling will be operational.

$CSTFA00

DEFAULT

Use default fixed channel

$CSTFA80

Enable frequency hopping The channel is changed automatically

238 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

it is possible to select a fixed channel with a frequency different from the default; please contact Datalogic Technical Support for information about this feature. For the 910 models, the radio range can change depending on the Frequency Agility parameter value; in particular, at low speed, the radio range is shorter when a fixed channel is programmed. See the Radio Range values in "Radio Features" on page 316 of Technical Specifications.

The frequency agility features are not equally supported for all model speeds. Please refer to the following table:

Table 26. Frequency Agility

Fixed Channel different Mode Frequency hopping from default

433 MHz Model Compatibile No No Normal, low speed Yes Yes Normal, intermediate speed No No Normal, high speed No No 910 MHz Model Normal, low speed Yes Yes Normal, high speed Yes Yes

Product Reference Guide 239 Enter/Exit Programming Mode COMPATIBILITY WITH PM8500

Compatibility Mode Powerscan PM9500 offers a limited set of features compatible with the previous PM8500 family. To access those features, you have to program the system through the Compatible Mode parameter. When in normal mode, the same parameter can be used to configure the communication speed. You must read the barcode "Restore Custom Defaults" on page 18 when switching from normal mode to compatible mode, or vice-versa.

Changing from Normal to Compatible Mode

PM9500 Handheld

1. With the PM9500, read the Compatible Mode (0) bar code below.

2. Now you can link your PM9500 with a BC8xxx as if it were a PM8500, assigning an address to the reader and performing a Join or Bind (see the Set Radio Address and Bind commands in the PM8500 QRG).

When the PM9500 is in Compatible Mode, some newer features (such as communication speed programming) will not be available.

$CSTCP00\r

Compatible Mode (0)

$CSTCP01\r

Normal Mode: Low Speed (1)

$CSTCP02\r

Normal Mode: Intermediate Speed (2)

$CSTCP03\r DEFAULT Normal Mode: High Speed (3)

240 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

BC9xxx Base The BC9xxx can be changed from Normal to Compatible mode using the Aladdin configuration tool. See "Datalogic Aladdin™" on page 6 for more information. This will allow you to Join or Bind a PM8500 to your BC9xxx.

Changing from Compatible Mode back to Normal

PM9500 Handheld

1. With the PM9500, read a Compatible mode programming label on page 240 with a value of “Low, Medium, or High Speed”.

2. With the PM9500, read the Unlink programing label.

3. Now you can link your PM9500 to a BC9xxx in normal mode; the PM9500 will inherit the programmed speed from the BC9xxx. BC9xxx Base

1. Using Datalogic Aladdin, change the Compatible Mode parameter to “Low, Medium, or High Speed”.

2. Now you can link a previously unlinked PM9500; the reader will inherit the speed programmed in the BC9xxx. If Aladdin is not available, use the following procedure:

1. With a PM9500 in normal mode, read the Unlink programming label on page 19, then read the following bar code:

Return to Normal

Do not scan an ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE label with this bar code.

2. Place the same PM9500 on your BC9xxx. Your BC9xxx will link to the PM9500 and will inherit the reader’s programmed speed.

Product Reference Guide 241 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Base Address Stamping Enables/disables the ability of base address information to be transmitted to the host and, if so, at what position with respect to the label data. See page 304 in “References” for detailed information and examples for setting this feature.

$CCNAS00(CR) DEFAULT Base Address Transmission = Do Not Include

$CCNAS01(CR)

Base Address Transmission = Prefix

Base Address Delimiter Character This option specifies the delimiter character to be placed between the label data and base address when address stamping is enabled.

This feature only applies if "Base Address Stamping" on page 242 is enabled.

$CCNAD To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO- GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by two digits from the Alphanumeric characters in representing Set Base Address Delimiter Character Appendix D, Keypad your desired character. End by scanning the ENTER/ EXIT bar code again.

~ Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT 00 = No Delimiter Character

242 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

RS-485 Master Header/Terminator ( Prefix/Suffix) Specifies the Master Cradle header or terminator characters to be added to a label sent to Host. The characters may be added as a prefix (in a position before the bar code data, also called a header) and/or as a suffix (in a position following the bar code data, also called a terminator). To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code above to place the unit in Programming Mode, then the “Set Master Cradle Prefix” or “Set Master Cradle Suffix” bar code followed by the digits (in hex) from the Alphanumeric characters in Appendix D, Keypad representing your desired character(s). If less than the expected string of 8 characters are selected, scan the ENTER/EXIT bar code to terminate the string. Exit programming mode by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

$CR4A0

Set Master Cradle Prefix

$CR4A1

Set Master Cradle Suffix

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and ~ not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

RS-485 Cradle Address Specifies the Address for the Cradle in the RS-485 network..

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO- $CS1AD GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by the digits from the Alphanumeric characters in Appendix D, Keypad representing your desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT Set Cradle Address bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and ~ not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

Product Reference Guide 243 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

RS-485 Slave Minimum Address Specifies the minimum address that can be set for a Cradle in an RS-485 network.

The maximum number of cradles in a single network is 16 (including the Master if present). All cradles in the system must have different addresses.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO- $CR4JB GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by four digits from the Alphanumeric characters in Appendix D, Keypad representing your desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT Slave Minimum Address bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and ~ not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

RS-485 Slave Maximum Address Specifies the maximum address that can be set for a Cradle in an RS-485 network.

The maximum number of cradles in a single network is 16 (including the Master if present). All cradles in the system must have different addresses.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO- $CR4JC GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by four digits from the Alphanumeric characters in Appendix D, Keypad representing your desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT Slave Maximum Address bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and ~ not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

244 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

RS-485 Network Working Mode Specifies the selection available for Cradle working mode in an RS-485 network.

$CR4RZ00\r DEFAULT

Disable Network

$CR4RZ01\r

Enable RS-485 Slave

$CR4RZ02\r

Enable RS-485 Master

RS-485 Network Warning Message Enable/Disable the ability of Cradle to transmit warning messages to the Host regarding some RS-485 network errors.

$CR4JG00\r DEFAULT

Not Transmitted

$CR4JG01\r

Transmitted

Product Reference Guide 245 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

RS-485 Transmission Warning Message Enable/Disable the ability of the cradle to transmit warning messages to the Host regarding wrong reception of data.

$CR4JH00\r DEFAULT

Not Transmitted

$CR4JH01\r

Transmitted

RS-485 Network Baud Rate Specifies the baud rate of an RS-485 network.

$CR4JE00\r DEFAULT

Baud Rate 9600

$CR4JE01\r

Baud Rate 19200

$CR4JE02\r

Baud Rate 34800

246 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode DISPLAY AND KEYBOARD FEATURES Two keyboard models are available, the 4-key model and the 16-key model. The following section contains configuration parameters that are common and applicable to both keypad models, unless specifically labeled as "4-key models only" or "16-key models only”. For more items for the 16-key model, see "Additional Features for 16-key models," starting on page 260. Display Operating Mode Select the operating mode of the display. Options are:

• Normal Mode: Display not cleared, no echo of the code on Display. • Local Echo: Display cleared after decode, echo of the code on display. • Clear display after decode: Display is cleared after decode, no echo.

$CDIMD00\r

Normal Mode = Display not cleared

$CDIMD01\r DEFAULT

Local echo mode

$CDIMD02\r

Clear display after decode

Product Reference Guide 247 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Display Off Timeout Sets the timeout for display, backlight and keyboard.

Display Off Timeout = Disabled

$CDIOT To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO- GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by two digits from the Alphanumeric characters in Appendix D, Keypad representing Set Display Off Timeout your desired character(s). End by scanning the ENTER/ EXIT bar code again.

~ Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

DEFAULT 08 = 8 second delay

Backlight Enable Enables/Disables the display backlight.

$CDIBL00\r DEFAULT

Backlight Disabled

$CDIBL01\r

Backlight Enabled

248 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Display Contrast Adjust the contrast of the display.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO- $CDICT

GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at

left followed by two digits (00-32 by 01) from the

Alphanumeric characters in Appendix D, Keypad representing your desired character(s). End by scan- Set Display Contrast ning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~ Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

Font Size Select the font size.

$CDIFS00\r DEFAULT

Font Size = Small

$CDIFS01\r

Font Size = Medium

$CDIFS02\r

Font Size = Large

Product Reference Guide 249 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Enable/disable buttons This feature offers the ability to enable or disable the keypad. Figure 6. PowerScan 9500 Keypad Models 4-key keypad 16-key keypad

Key Programming

$CPWFZFFFF\r

DEFAULT All keys enabled

$CPWFZ0000\r

All keys disabled To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO- $CPWFZ GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by 4 digits from the Alphanumeric characters in Appendix D, Keypad. 4-key models only: The last 3 digits must always be 0; Enable a combination of keys (4-key models only) the 4 bits of the first digit must be 1 if the corresponding key is enabled; the four bits represent, starting from the highest: Arrow Up, F2, F1, Arrow Down. End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and ~ not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

250 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Arrow Keys Mode (4-key models only) Configure the Arrow Keys functionality type. Two options are available:

Function Keys Action Select mode: When in this mode, arrow keys are used to select one of the 3 possible actions associated to the Function Keys. To associate actions to the Function keys, see " Configure Actions for Function keys" on page 253.

String Association Mode: When in this mode, each one of the arrow keys can be programmed to display and transmit a pre-defined string (see "Arrow Up String (4-key models only)" on page 251 and "Arrow Down String (4-key models only)" on page 252).

$CDIAC00\r

DEFAULT Function Keys Action Select mode

$CDIAC01\r

String Association Mode

Arrow Up String (4-key models only) Associate a pre-defined string to the Arrow Up key

$CDAUS To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO- GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left. Define the label string by further scanning 32 digits from the Alphanumeric characters in Appen- . Set string for Arrow Up Key dix D, Keypad The digits must be the hexadecimal ASCII representation of the desired characters; if less than the expected string of 16 characters are selected, scan the ENTER/ EXIT bar code to terminate the string. End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~ Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

Product Reference Guide 251 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Arrow Down String (4-key models only) Associate a pre-defined string to the Arrow Down key

$CDADS To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO- GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left. Define the label string by further scanning 32 digits from the Alphanumeric characters in Appendix . Set string for Arrow Down Key D, Keypad The digits must be the hexadecimal ASCII representation of the desired characters; if less than the expected string of 16 characters are selected, scan the ENTER/ EXIT bar code to terminate the string. End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

~ Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

252 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

CONFIGURE ACTIONS FOR FUNCTION KEYS Each of the function keys can be programmed to perform a user-assigned function. This is done by associating a function key with either a predefined command or your own custom string. See the "Define Strings" on page 257command to define customized strings. Each function key has an associated label which shows in the display when active. The default labels are shown in the table below. To program the function key labels, see " Set String ID" on page 258. The following table shows the list of predefined commands and available strings.

Table 27. Keyboard Programming

Default CMD_ID Name Function 16K 4K Label  Not configured action.  If a key must be kept enabled but isn’t required 0 Not configured in normal mode , this function can be selected to  keep it ineffective. Whenever an unconfigured function key is pressed, an error message appears on the display and an error beep is emitted. 1 Enter CMD Same as ENTER_KEY. Ent   2 String 1 Display and transmit string 1. S1T   3 String 2 Display and transmit string 2. S2T  4 String 3 Display and transmit string 3. S3T   5 String 4 Display and transmit string 4. S4T  6 String 5 Display and transmit string 5. S5T   7 Backlight CMD Toggle backlight on/off. Blt  8 Clear CMD Clears the screen CLR   9 Backspace CMD Same as Backspace key.    If pressed once, it recalls the last code sent out. A Recall Rcl If pressed twice, resends the last code.   B Show Date/Time Display the internal date, time. Tim  C Scroll Up Scroll up display content by row Up  D Scroll Down Scroll down display content by row Dwn  E Dot char Display dot [.] char [.]   Dynamic  F Dynamic Quantity Code function Qty Quantity  

Product Reference Guide 253 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

ACTION CONFIGURATION FOR FUNCTION KEYS Configure actions (up to three) for the function keys Configure Actions for F1

$CPWEV0000\r DEFAULT

F1 No Actions Configured To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO- $CPWEV GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code for the Function Key you want to program. Next scan 4 digits from the Alphanumeric characters in Appendix D, Keypad. Configures Action for F1 The first digit must be 0; the following 3 digits must be configured according to the CMD_ID numbers in Table 27 on page 253. End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and ~ not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

Configure Actions for F2

$CPWET0000\r DEFAULT

F2 No Actions Configured To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO- $CPWET GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code for the Function Key you want to program. Next scan 4 digits from the Alphanumeric characters in Appendix D, Keypad. Configure Actions for F2 The first digit must be 0; the following 3 digits must be configured according to the CMD_ID numbers in Table 27 on page 253. End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and ~ not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

254 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

FUNCTION KEYS CONFIGURATION (16-KEY MODELS ONLY) Function Keys F3 through F5 are available on 16-key models only. For more 16-key programming, see "Additional Features for 16-key models" on page 260. Configure Actions for F3 (16-key models only)

$CPWEU0000\r DEFAULT

F3 No Actions Configured To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO- $CPWEU GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code for the Function Key you want to program. Next scan 4 digits from the Alphanumeric characters in Appendix D, Keypad. Configure Actions for F3 The first digit must be 0; the following 3 digits must be configured according to the CMD_ID numbers in Table 27 on page 253. End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Configure Actions for F4 (16-key models only)

$CPWES0000\r DEFAULT

F4 No Actions Configured To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO- $CPWES GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code for the Function Key you want to program. Next scan 4 digits from the Alphanumeric characters in Appendix D, Keypad. Configure Actions for F4 The first digit must be 0; the following 3 digits must be configured according to the CMD_ID numbers in Table 27 on page 253. End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Product Reference Guide 255 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Configure Actions for Shift (16-key models only)

$CPWEQ0000\r DEFAULT

Shift No Actions Configured To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO- $CPWEQ GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code for the Function Key you want to program. Next scan 4 digits from the Alphanumeric characters in Appendix D, Keypad. Configure Actions for Shift The first digit must be 0; the following 3 digits must be configured according to the CMD_ID numbers in Table 27 on page 253. End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

256 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Define Strings Configure string 1-5. To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code at the top of the page, then the bar code for the String you want to set. Define the label string by scanning 32 digits from the Alphanumeric characters in Appendix D, Keypad. The digits must be the hexadecimal ASCII representation of the desired characters; if less than the expected string of 16 characters are selected, scan the ENTER/EXIT bar code to terminate the string. End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

$CPWEP

Set String 1

$CPWEO

Set String 2

$CPWEA

Set String 3

$CPWEM

Set String 4

$CPWEL

Set String 5

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and ~ not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

Product Reference Guide 257 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Set String ID Sets the identifier of the predefined strings.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO- $CPWEB GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by 6 digits from the Alphanumeric characters in Appendix D, Keypad. Set String ID The ID characters must be represented by their hexadecimal ASCII code; if the first 2 digits are 0, this feature is disabled. End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and ~ not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

Set String Header Sets the header of the predefined strings.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO- $CPWED GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by 32 digits from the Alphanumeric characters in Appendix D, Keypad. Set String Header The digits must be the hexadecimal ASCII representation of the desired characters. If less than the expected string of 16 characters are selected, scan the ENTER/ EXIT bar code to terminate the string. If the first 2 digits are 0, the feature is disabled. End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and ~ not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

258 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Set String Terminator Sets the terminator of the predefined strings.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO- $CPWEF GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by 32 digits from the Alphanumeric characters in Appendix D, Keypad. Set String Terminator The digits must be the hexadecimal ASCII representation of the desired characters. If less than the expected string of 16 characters are selected, scan the ENTER/ EXIT bar code to terminate the string. If the first 2 digits are 0, the feature is disabled. End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and ~ not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

Product Reference Guide 259 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

ADDITIONAL FEATURES FOR 16-KEY MODELS See also "Function Keys Configuration (16-key models only)" on page 255. Last Code Shown Timeout After the CODE transmission, the last code read will be shown on the display for a configurable timeout (LAST CODE SHOWN TOUT). . The standard DISPLAY OFF TIMEOUT (see page 248) has a higher pri- ority than the LAST CODE SHOWN TOUT, so the two parameters should be combined to get the desired result.

To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO- $CDIST GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by 2 digits (00-63 by 01) from the Alphanu- meric characters in Appendix D, Keypad. Last Code Shown Timeout End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and ~ not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

Display Time Stamping Mode Time Stamping Mode can be applied when entering data from either a barcode, from the keyboard, or both.

$CDITS00\r DEFAULT

Applied to both

$CDITS01\r

Applied only to barcode data

$CDITS02\r

Applied only to keyboard data

260 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Mode Selection This feature allows the PowerScan 16K model to operate in one of two basic operative modes: • Normal Mode — data entered, either on the keypad or read via barcode, is transmitted to the host once the enter key is pressed, following the configured formatting. • Quantity/Code Mode — Can be further configured. See the next sections for Qty/Code operations. .

$CDISM00\r DEFAULT

Set Normal Mode

$CDISM01\r

Set QtylCode Mode

Quantity Field This feature defines the behavior of the scanner if no data is entered in the QTY field so that it is left empty. Options are: • code is transmitted with default QTY (‘1’) • code is transmitted alone (without any quantity information) • code is discarded and an error beep is generated

$CPWEK00\r DEFAULT

Transmit code with default qty (1)

$CPWEK01\r

Transmit Code only

$CPWEK02\r

Discard Code

Product Reference Guide 261 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Quantity/Code Send Mode This feature defines the rules that will be used to send a QTY/CODE pair:

0. Code is transmitted with QTY field (and its predefined format) preced- ing CODE field (and its predefined format)

1. Code is transmitted with CODE field (and its predefined format) preced- ing QTY field (and its predefined format)

2. Code in CODE field is sent out for the number of times defined in the QTY field

$CPWEH00\r DEFAULT

Qty precedes Code

$CPWEH01\r

Code precedes Qty

$CPWEH02\r

Code transmitted Qty times

Quantity/Code Separator This feature allows the insertion of a separator between Qty/Code pairs.

$CPWQP00\r DEFAULT

No separator To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO- $CPWQP GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the barcode at left. Next scan 1 digit from Appendix D, Keypad (in the range 1-8) representing the number of characters to be used as separator. Set Qty/Code string separator Finally, define the separator string by reading the desired characters from the ASCII table at the back of this manual, expressed in hexadecimal form. End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

262 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Interkey Timeout The 16-key keypad is organized like a cell phone, with multi-tap access to alpha characters on numeric keys. In alphabetic mode (entered by toggling the SHIFT key), the keys must be pressed once, twice, or more to obtain the desired letter. This command allows you to specify the time which occurs between a key press, and the confirmation of the letter by the scanner (when in alpha mode). The timeout can be configured in increments of 0.5 second.

$CPWNT00\r

0.5 seconds

$CPWNT01\r DEFAULT

1.0 seconds

$CPWNT02\r

1.5 seconds

$CPWNT03\r

2.0 seconds

Product Reference Guide 263 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Append Code This function defines how a scanned barcode interacts with a pre-edited CODE field, or with a string entered by a preprogrammed FUNC KEY. Options are:

0. Barcode data overwrites what is written in the CODE field by keyboard and the code is transmitted;

1. Barcode data is appended to any text in the CODE field and the code is transmitted;

2. Barcode data is appended to any text in the CODE field but the code IS NOT transmitted. Data is transmitted when the enter key is pressed.

$CPWFW00\r DEFAULT

Overwrite always

$CPWFW01\r

Append and transmit

$CPWFW02\r

Append and don’t transmit

264 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Echo This function enables/disables the keypad echo. It works only when the scanner is in simple data input mode (no QTY/CODE).

$CPWKE00\r DEFAULT

Full Keypad echo

$CPWKE01\r

No echo on function key

$CPWKE02\r

No echo on any key

Keypress Sound Enables/disables the KEY press sound (‘click’).

$CPWEI00\r

Disable

$CPWEI01\r DEFAULT

Enable

Product Reference Guide 265 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

SHIFT Enable/Disable This function enables/disables the SHIFT function.

$CPWER00\r

Disable SHIFT function

$CPWER01\r DEFAULT

Enable SHIFT function

SHIFT key association This function allows the association of the SHIFT function to one of the following keys: F1, F2, F3, F4, ↑ (up arrow key).

$CPWEY01\r

Associate SHIFT to F1

$CPWEY02\r

Associate SHIFT to F2

$CPWEY03\r

Associate SHIFT to F3

$CPWEY04\r

Associate SHIFT to F4

$CPWEY05\r

Associate SHIFT to ↑

266 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Lower Case This function enables/disables the capability to use the SHIFT key to switch to Lower Case (alphanumeric) mode. When enabled, the indication in the upper right corner of display is ‘ab’.

$CPWSA00\r DEFAULT

Disable Lower Case

$CPWSA01\r

Enable Lower Case

SET FUNCTION KEY LABELS Set F1 Label This item allows the user to change the default mnemonic label associated to each individual function key. This is done by programming a short acro- nym 4-character string to be shown in the bottom of the display. The pur- pose of the label is to serve as an indication of the programmed function of the Function Key below it. To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO- $CPWSB GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by 8 digits from the Appendix D, Key- pad. The digits must be the hexadecimal ASCII representation of the desired characters. Set F1 label End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Set F2 Label This item allows the user to change the default mnemonic label associated to each individual function key. This is done by programming a short acro- nym 4-character string to be shown in the bottom of the display. The pur- pose of the label is to serve as an indication of the programmed function of the Function Key below it. To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO- $CPWSC GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by 8 digits from the Appendix D, Key- pad. The digits must be the hexadecimal ASCII representation of the desired characters. Set F2 label End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Product Reference Guide 267 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Set F3 Label This item allows the user to change the default mnemonic label associated to each individual function key. This is done by programming a short acro- nym 4-character string to be shown in the bottom of the display. The pur- pose of the label is to serve as an indication of the programmed function of the Function Key below it. To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO- $CPWSD GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by 8 digits from the Appendix D, Key- pad. The digits must be the hexadecimal ASCII representation of the desired characters. Set F3 label End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Set F4 Label This item allows the user to change the default mnemonic label associated to each individual function key. This is done by programming a short acro- nym 4-character string to be shown in the bottom of the display. The pur- pose of the label is to serve as an indication of the programmed function of the Function Key below it. To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO- $CPWSE GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by 8 digits from the Appendix D, Key- pad. The digits must be the hexadecimal ASCII representation of the desired characters. Set F4 label End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

268 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Barcode/Key Different Data Format If this parameter is enabled, barcode and keyboard entered data can be for- matted separately. More specifically: if this parameter is disabled, barcode and keyboard data will share the same Header and Terminator defined using “Set Barcode Header” and “Set Barcode Terminator” below. If this parameter is enabled, keyboard entered data are treated differently, as their format must be programmed through the parameters "Set String Header", "Set String Terminator", "Set Key Sequence Header" and "Set Key Sequence Ter- minator".

$CPWDF00\r DEFAULT

Disable

$CPWDF01\r

Enable Set Barcode Header Sets the header for barcode and keyboard composed strings.

$CPWBH To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO- GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by 32 digits from the Alphanumeric characters in Appendix D, Keypad. The digits must be the Set barcode header hexadecimal ASCII representation of the desired characters. If less than the expected string of 16 characters are selected, scan the ENTER/EXIT bar code to terminate the string. If the first 2 digits are 0, the feature is disabled. End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Set Barcode Terminator Sets the terminator for barcode and keyboard composed strings.

$CPWBT To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO- GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by 32 digits from the Alphanumeric characters in Appendix D, Keypad. The digits must be the Set barcode terminator hexadecimal ASCII representation of the desired characters. If less than the expected string of 16 characters are selected, scan the ENTER/EXIT bar code to terminate the string. If the first 2 digits are 0, the feature is disabled. End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Product Reference Guide 269 Enter/Exit Programming Mode

Set Key Sequence ID Sets the identifier for keyboard composed strings. To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO- $CPWEC GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by 6 digits from Appendix D, Keypad. The ID characters must be represented by their hexadeci- Set keys sequence ID mal ASCII code; if the first 2 digits are 0, this feature is disabled. End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Set Key Sequence Header Sets the header for keyboard composed strings.

$CPWE1 To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO- GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by 32 digits from the Alphanumeric characters in Appendix D, Keypad. The digits must be Set key sequence header the hexadecimal ASCII representation of the desired characters. If less than the expected string of 16 characters are selected, scan the ENTER/EXIT bar code to terminate the string. If the first 2 digits are 0, the feature is disabled. End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

Set Key Sequence Terminator Sets the terminator for keyboard composed strings.

$CPWE2 To configure this feature, scan the ENTER/EXIT PRO- GRAMMING MODE bar code above, then the bar code at left followed by 32 digits from the Alphanumeric characters in Appendix D, Keypad. The digits must be Set key sequence terminator the hexadecimal ASCII representation of the desired characters. If less than the expected string of 16 characters are selected, scan the ENTER/EXIT bar code to terminate the string. If the first 2 digits are 0, the feature is disabled. End by scanning the ENTER/EXIT bar code again.

270 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Chapter 4 References

This section contains explanations and examples of selected bar code features. See Configuration Using Bar Codes, starting on page 21 for the actual bar code labels used to configure the reader.

RS-232 PARAMETERS on page 272 • RS-232 Only on page 272 • RS-232/USB COM Parameters on page 273

KEYBOARD INTERFACE on page 280 • Wedge Quiet Interval on page 280 • Intercharacter Delay on page 281 • Intercode Delay on page 282

SYMBOLOGIES on page 283 • Datamatrix DPM Decoding Safety on page 283 • Set Length on page 283

DATA EDITING on page 285 • Global Prefix/Suffix on page 286 • Global AIM ID on page 286 • Label ID on page 288 • Character Conversion on page 293

READING PARAMETERS on page 294 • Good Read LED Duration on page 294

SCANNING FEATURES on page 295 • Scan Mode on page 295 • Stand Mode Off Time on page 296 • Scanning Active Time on page 297 • Aiming Duration Time on page 298 • Flash On Time on page 299 • Flash Off Time on page 300 • Multiple Labels Ordering by Code Symbology on page 301

WIRELESS FEATURES starting on page 304 • Automatic Configuration Update • RF Address Stamping • RF Address Stamping • PM9500-Only Features • Bluetooth-Only Features

MOTION FEATURES on page 303 • Motionless Timeout on page 303

Product Reference Guide 271 References RS-232 Parameters

RS-232 Only

Baud Rate Baud rate is the number of bits of data transmitted per second. Set the reader's baud rate to match the baud rate setting of the host device. With an improper baud rate setting, data may not reach the host correctly. Stop Bits The stop bit(s) at the end of each transmitted character marks the end of transmission of one character and prepares the receiving device for the next character in the serial data stream. The number of stop bits selected (one or two) depends on the number the receiving terminal is programmed to accommodate. Set the number of stop bits to match host device requirements. Parity This feature specifies parity required for sending and receiving data. A parity check bit is the most significant bit of each ASCII coded character. Select the parity type according to host device requirements. • Select None when no parity bit is required. • Select Odd parity and the parity bit value is set to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that an odd number of 1 bits are contained in the coded character. • Select Even parity and the parity bit value is set to 0 or 1, based on data, to ensure that an even number of 1 bits are contained in the coded character. Handshaking Control The data interface consists of an RS-232 port designed to operate either with or without the hardware handshaking lines, Request to Send (RTS), and Clear to Send (CTS). Handshaking Control includes the following options: • RTS — RTS is asserted during transmissions. CTS is ignored. • RTS/CTS — RTS is asserted during transmissions. CTS gates transmissions. • RTS/XON/XOFF — RTS is asserted during transmissions. CTS is ignored. XON and XOFF gate transmissions. • RTS On/CTS — RTS is always asserted. CTS gates transmissions. RTS/CTS Scan Control — RTS is asserted during transmissions. CTS gates transmissions and controls enable and disable state of scanner.

272 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 RS-232 Parameters RS-232/USB COM Parameters

1. Determine the desired setting in milliseconds.

2. Divide the desired setting by 10 (setting is in 10ms increments). Pad the result with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 = 05, 20 = 20, etc.

3. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter Program- ming Mode.

4. Go to page 31 and scan the bar code: SELECT INTERCHARACTER DELAY SETTING.

5. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Key- pad, that represent the duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character. If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit. This completes the procedure. See Table 28 for some examples of how to set this feature.

Table 28. Intercharacter Delay Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES

1 Desired Setting 50ms 150ms 600ms 850ms

Divide by 10 (pad with 2 leading zeroes to yield 05 15 60 85 two-digits)

3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

4 Scan SELECT INTERCHARACTER DELAY SETTING

Scan Two Characters From 5 ‘0’ and ‘5’ ‘5’ and ‘0’ ‘6’ and ‘0’ ‘8’ and ‘5’ Appendix D, Keypad 6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Product Reference Guide 273 References ACK NAK Options This enables/disables the ability of the reader to support the RS-232 ACK/ NAK protocol. When configured, the reader and/or host sends an “ACK” when it receives data properly, and sends “NAK” when the data is in error. Options are: •Disable • Enable for label transmission — The reader expects an ACK/NAK response from the host when a label is sent. • Enable for host-command acknowledge — The reader will respond with ACK/NAK when the host sends a command. • Enable for label transmission and host-command acknowledge ACK Character This setting specifies an ASCII character or hex value to be used as the ACK character. ASCII characters or any hex value from 0 to 0xFF can be selected. Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host commands conflicts with normal operation of these characters. 8-bit data is not recognized when the option Data Bits has been set as 7 Data Bits.

1. Determine the desired character or value.

2. Use the ASCII Chart on the inside back cover of this manual to find the hex equivalent for the desired character/value.

3. Go to page 33 and scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE to enter Programming Mode.

4. Scan the bar code: SELECT ACK CHARACTER SETTING.

5. Scan the appropriate two alphanumeric characters from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad, that represent the desired character/value in step 1 above. The second character will cause a two-beep indication.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit. See Table 29 for some examples of how to set this feature.

Table 29. ACK Character Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES

1 Desired Character/Value ACK $ @ >

Hex equivalent from 2 ASCII 0x06 0x24 0x40 0x3E Chart 3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

4 Scan SELECT ACK CHARACTER SETTING Scan Two Characters from 5 ‘0’ and ‘6’ ‘2’ and ‘4’ ‘4’ and ‘0’ ‘3’ AND ‘E’ Appendix D, Keypad 6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

274 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 RS-232 Parameters NAK Character This setting specifies an ASCII character or hex value to be used as the NAK character. ASCII characters or any hex value from 0 to 0xFF can be selected. Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host commands conflicts with normal operation of these characters. 8-bit data is not recognized when the option Data Bits has been set as 7 Data Bits.

To set this feature:

1. Determine the desired character or value.

2. Use the ASCII Chart on the inside back cover of this manual to find the hex equivalent for the desired character/value.

3. Go to page 33 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter Programming Mode.

4. Scan the bar code: SELECT NAK CHARACTER SETTING.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Program- ming Mode. This completes the procedure. See Table 30 for some examples of how to set this feature.

Table 30. NAK Character Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES

1 Desired Character/Value NAK $ @ >

Hex equivalent from 2 ASCII 0x15 0x24 0x40 0x3E Chart 3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

4 Scan SELECT NAK CHARACTER SETTING Scan Two Characters From 5 ‘1’ and ‘5’ ‘2’ and ‘4’ ‘4’ and ‘0’ ‘3’ AND ‘E’ Appendix D, Keypad 6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Product Reference Guide 275 References ACK NAK Timeout Value This option specifies the amount of time the reader waits for an ACK character from the host following label transmission. The selectable timeout range is 200 milliseconds to 15,000ms (15 seconds) in 200ms increments. A selection of 0 disables the timeout. To set this value:

1. Determine the desired setting in milliseconds.

2. Divide the desired setting by 200 (setting is in 200ms increments). Pad the result with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 = 05, 20 = 20, etc.

3. Go to page 34 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter Programming Mode.

4. Scan the bar code: SELECT ACK NAK TIMEOUT VALUE SETTING.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Program- ming Mode. This completes the procedure. See Table 31 for some examples of how to set this feature.

Table 31. ACK NAK Timeout Value Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES 5200ms (5.2 1 Desired Setting 200ms 1,000ms (1 sec.) 15,000ms (15 sec.) sec.) 2 Divide by 200 01 05 26 75 3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

4 Scan SELECT ACK NAK TIMEOUT VALUE SETTING

Scan Two Characters From 5 ‘0’ and ‘1’ ‘0’ and ‘5’ ‘2’ and ‘6’ ‘7’ and ‘5’ Appendix D, Keypad 6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

276 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 RS-232 Parameters ACK NAK Retry Count This feature specifies the number of times the reader retries a label transmission due to a retry condition. The selectable range is from 1 to 254 retries. A selection of 0 disables the count, and a selection of 255 specifies unlimited retries.

To set this feature:

1. Determine the desired setting.

2. Pad the number with leading zeroes to yield three digits. For example: 0 = 000, 5 = 005, 20 = 020, etc.

3. Go to page 34 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter Programming Mode.

4. Scan the bar code: SELECT ACK NAK RETRY COUNT SETTING.

5. Scan the appropriate three digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Key- pad, that represent the number which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character. If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Program- ming Mode. This completes the procedure. See Table 32 for some examples of how to set this feature.

Table 32. ACK NAK Retry Count Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES Disable Retry 1 Desired Setting 3 Retries 54 Retries Unlimited Retries Count 2 Pad with leading zero(es) 000 003 054 255

3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

4 Scan SELECT ACK NAK RETRY COUNT SETTING Scan Three Characters 5 From Appendix D, ‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘0’ ‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘3’ ‘0’, ‘5’ and ‘4’ ‘2’, ‘5’ and ‘5’ Keypad 6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Product Reference Guide 277 References Disable Character Specifies the value of the RS-232 host command used to disable the reader. ASCII characters or any hex value from 0 to 0xFF can be selected. Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host commands conflicts with normal operation of these characters. 8-bit data is not recognized when the option Data Bits has been set as 7 Data Bits.

To set the value:

1. Determine the desired character or value. A setting of 0xFF indicates the Disable Character is not used (not available).

2. Use the ASCII Chart on the inside back cover of this manual to find the hex equivalent for the desired character/value.

3. Go to page 36 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter Programming Mode.

4. Scan the bar code: SELECT DISABLE CHARACTER SETTING.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Program- ming Mode. This completes the procedure. See Table 33 for some examples of how to set this feature.

Table 33. Disable Character Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES Disable Command 1 Desired character/value ‘d’ ‘}’ ‘D’ Not Used Hex equivalent from 2 ASCII 0x64 0x7D 0x44 0xFF Chart 3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 4 Scan SELECT DISABLE CHARACTER VALUE SETTING

Scan Two Characters From 5 ‘6’ and ‘4’ ‘7’ and ‘D’ ‘4’ and ‘4’ ‘F’ AND ‘F’ Appendix D, Keypad 6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

278 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 RS-232 Parameters Enable Character Specifies the value of the RS-232 host command used to enable the reader. ASCII characters or any hex value from 0 to 0xFF can be selected. Setting to previously defined characters such as XON, XOFF, or host commands conflicts with normal operation of these characters. 8-bit data is not recognized when the option Data Bits has been set as 7 Data Bits.

To set this feature: Determine the desired character or value. A setting of 0xFF indicates the Enable Character is not used (not available).

1. Determine the desired character or value.

2. Use the ASCII Chart on the inside back cover of this manual to find the hex equivalent for the desired character/value.

3. Go to page 36 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter Programming Mode.

4. Scan the bar code: SELECT ENABLE CHARACTER SETTING.

5. Scan the appropriate two alphanumeric characters from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad, that represent the desired character/value in step 2 above. The second character will cause a two-beep indication.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Program- ming Mode. This completes the procedure. See Table 34 for some examples of how to set this feature.

Table 34. Enable Character Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES Enable Command 1 Desired character/value ‘e’ ‘}’ ‘E’ Not Used Hex equivalent from 2 ASCII 0x65 0x7D 0x45 0xFF Chart 3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE 4 Scan SELECT ENABLE CHARACTER VALUE SETTING

Scan Two Characters From 5 ‘6’ and ‘5’ ‘7’ and ‘D’ ‘4’ and ‘5’ ‘F’ AND ‘F’ Appendix D, Keypad 6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Product Reference Guide 279 References Keyboard Interface

Wedge Quiet Interval Specifies the amount of time the reader looks for keyboard activity before it breaks the keyboard connection in order to transmit data to host. The range is from 0 to 990ms in 10ms increments.

This feature applies ONLY to the Keyboard Wedge interface.

1. Determine the desired setting in milliseconds.

2. Divide the desired setting by 10 (setting is in 10ms increments). Pad the result with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 = 05, 20 = 20, etc.

3. Go to page 42 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter Prog. Mode.

4. Scan the bar code: SELECT WEDGE QUIET INTERVAL SETTING.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit. This completes the procedure to set the Wedge Quiet Interval. See Table 35 for some examples of how to set this feature.

Table 35. Wedge Quiet Interval Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES

1 Desired Setting 10ms 150ms 600ms 850ms

Divide by 10 (and pad with 2 01 15 60 85 leading zeroes)

3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

4 Scan SELECT WEDGE QUIET INTERVAL SETTING

Scan Two Characters From 5 ‘0’ and ‘1’ ‘1’ and ‘5’ ‘6’ and ‘0’ ‘8’ and ‘5’ Appendix D, Keypad 6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

280 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Keyboard Interface Intercharacter Delay This parameter specifies the intercharacter delay between the end of one character and the beginning of the next. The delay can be set within a range of zero (0) to 990 milliseconds in 10ms increments. A setting of zero specifies no delay.

This feature applies ONLY to the Keyboard Wedge interface.

To set the delay:

1. Determine the desired setting in milliseconds.

2. Divide the desired setting by 10 (setting is in 10ms increments). Pad the result with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 = 05, 20 = 20, etc.

3. Go to page 31 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter Programming Mode.

4. Scan the bar code: SELECT INTERCHARACTER DELAY SETTING.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Program- ming Mode. This completes the procedure. See Table 36 for some examples of how to set this feature.

Table 36. Intercharacter Delay Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES

1 Desired Setting 50ms 150ms 600ms 850ms

Divide by 10 (and pad with 2 leading zeroes to yield 05 15 60 85 two-digits)

3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

4 Scan SELECT INTERCHARACTER DELAY SETTING

Scan Two Characters From 5 ‘0’ and ‘5’ ‘1’ and ‘5’ ‘6’ and ‘0’ ‘8’ and ‘5’ Appendix D, Keypad 6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Product Reference Guide 281 References Intercode Delay Specifies the delay between labels transmitted to the host for this interface. The selectable range for this feature is from 0 to 99 seconds. Follow these instructions to set this feature:

1. Determine the desired setting.

2. Pad the number with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 = 05, 20 = 20, etc

3. Go to page 42 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter Programming Mode.

4. Scan the bar code: SELECT INTERCODE DELAY SETTING.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Program- ming Mode. This completes the procedure. See Table 37 for some examples of how to set this feature.

Table 37. Wedge Intercode Delay Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES

1 Desired Setting No Delay 5 Seconds 60 Seconds 99 Seconds

2 Pad with leading zero(es) 00 05 60 99

3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

4 Scan SELECT INTERCODE DELAY SETTING Scan Two Characters From 5 ‘0’ and ‘0’ ‘0’ and ‘5’ ‘6’ and ‘0’ ‘9’ AND ‘9’ Appendix D, Keypad 6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

282 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Symbologies Symbologies

Datamatrix DPM Decoding Safety Decoding Safety is used to configure a decoder to be very aggressive to very conservative, depending on a particular customer’s needs. • Level 1 results in a very aggressive decoder. • Level 5 results in a very conservative decoder at the expense of not being able to read poorly printed or damaged labels. There are many factors that determine when to change the decoding safety. These factors include spots, voids, non-uniform backgrounds, damaged labels, etc. that may be experienced in some barcode labels. If there are many hard to read or damaged labels that cannot be decoded using a conservative setting, decrease the decoding safety to be more aggressive. In case of rigorous reliability application requirements it is suggested to use higher decoding safety values (conservative).

Set Length Length Control allows you to select either variable length decoding or fixed length decoding for the specified symbology.

Variable Length: For variable length decoding, a minimum and maximum length may be set.

Fixed Length: For fixed length decoding, two different lengths may be set. Set Length 1 This feature specifies one of the bar code lengths for Length Control. Length 1 is the minimum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the first fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. Length includes the bar code’s data characters only. The number of characters that can be set varies, depending on the symbology. Reference the page for your selected symbology to see specific vari- ables.

1. Determine the desired character length (varies depending on symbology). Pad the number with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 = 05, 20 = 20, etc.

2. Go to the Set Length page for your selected symbology and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter Programming Mode.

3. Scan the bar code to SELECT LENGTH 1 SETTING for your selected symbology.

4. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Key- pad, that represent the length setting which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character. If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

Product Reference Guide 283 References

5. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Prog Mode. Set Length 2 This feature allows you to set one of the bar code lengths for the specified symbology. Length 2 is the maximum label length if in Variable Length Mode, or the second fixed length if in Fixed Length Mode. See the page for the specific symbology for parameters. The length that can be set varies depending on the symbology. A setting of 0 specifies to ignore this length (only one fixed length). Follow these instructions to set this feature:

1. Determine the desired character length (from 1 to 50 — or 0 to ignore this length). Pad the number with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 = 05, 20 = 20, etc.

2. Go to the Set Length page for your selected symbology and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter Programming Mode.

3. Scan the bar code to SELECT LENGTH 2 SETTING for your selected symbology.

4. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad that represent the length setting which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character. If you make a mistake, before the last character scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

5. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Program- ming Mode. This completes the procedure.

284 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Data Editing Data Editing

When a bar code is scanned, additional information can be sent to the host computer along with the bar code data. This combination of bar code data and supplementary user-defined data is called a “message string.” The Data Editing features can be used to build specific user-defined data into a message string. There are several types of selectable data characters that can be sent before and after scanned data. You can specify if they should be sent with all symbologies, or only with specific symbologies. Figure 7 shows the available elements you can add to a message string: Figure 7. Breakdown of a Message String Label ID Transmission: Enable this option to transmit the Label ID you configure for the scanned symbology. OR...

Prefix Label IDAIM ID Bar Code Data Label ID Suffix AIM ID: This function is used to identify and display the common label identifier for its symbology. When enabled, this ID code will be transmitted before the scanned bar code data. 00 - 20 Characters (ASCII)

Additional advanced editing is available. See the Advanced formatting features in the Datalogic Aladdin configuration software, or contact Technical Support (as described on page 2) for more information.

Please Keep In Mind... • Modifying a message string is not a mandatory requirement. Data editing is a sophisticated feature allowing highly customizable output for advanced users. Factory default settings for data editing is typically set to NONE. • A prefix or suffix may be applied only to a specified symbology (reference 1D Symbologies, starting on page 81 or 2D Symbologies, starting on page 173 ) or across all symbologies (set via the Global features in this chapter). • You can add any character from the ASCII Chart (from 00-FF) on the inside back cover of this manual as a prefix, suffix or Label ID. • Enter prefixes and suffixes in the order in which you want them to appear on the output.

Product Reference Guide 285 References Global Prefix/Suffix Up to 20 ASCII characters may be added as a prefix (in a position before the bar code data) and/or as a suffix (in a position following the bar code data) as indicated in Figure 8. Figure 8. Prefix and Suffix Positions

OR...

Prefix Label IDAIM ID Bar Code Data Label ID Suffix

00 - 20 Characters (ASCII) AND OR

Example: Setting a Prefix In this example, we’ll set a prefix for all symbologies.

1. Determine which ASCII character(s) are to be added to scanned bar code data. In this example, we’ll add a dollar sign (‘$’) as a prefix.

2. Go to page 50 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code, then scan the SET GLOBAL PREFIX bar code.

3. Reference the ASCII Chart on the inside back cover of this manual to find the hex value assigned to the desired character. The corresponding hex number for the ‘$’ character is 24. To enter this selection code, scan the ‘2’ and ‘4’ bar codes from Appendix D, Keypad. If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

4. If less than the expected string of 20 characters are selected, scan the ENTER/EXIT bar code to terminate the string.

5. Scan the ENTER/EXIT bar code once again to exit Programming Mode.

6. The resulting message string would appear as follows: Scanned bar code data: 12345 Resulting message string output: $12345

Global AIM ID

This feature enables/disables addition of AIM IDs for all symbology types.

AIM label identifiers (as opposed to custom characters you select yourself as with label identifiers) can be included with scanned bar code data. AIM label identifiers consist of three characters as follows: • A close brace character (ASCII ‘]’), followed by... • A code character (see the table below), followed by...

286 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Data Editing

• A modifier character (the modifier character is symbol dependent).

SYMBOLOGY CHAR SYMBOLOGY CHAR

UPC/EAN Ea Code 128/GS1-128 C DataBar Omnidirec- Code 39 and  A tional, DataBar e Code 32 Expanded

Codabar F Standard 2 of 5 S

Interleaved 2 of 5 I ISBN Xb

Code 93 G Code 11 H

a. UPC-A and UPC-E labels are converted to EAN 13 when adding AIM IDs. b. ISBN (X with a 0 modifier character)

Figure 9. AIM ID

Prefix Label ID AIM ID Bar Code Data Label ID Suffix

Product Reference Guide 287 References Label ID A Label ID is a customizable code of up to three ASCII characters (each can be one of hex 0x01-0xFF), used to identify a bar code (symbology) type. It can be appended previous to or following the transmitted bar code data depending upon how this option is enabled. This feature provides options for configuring custom Label IDs as a pre-loaded set (see "Label ID: Pre- loaded Sets" below) or individually per symbology (see "Label ID: Set Individ- ually Per Symbology" on page 291). If you wish to program the reader to always include an industry standard label identifier for ALL symbology types, see "Global AIM ID" on page 51. Label ID: Pre-loaded Sets The reader supports two pre-loaded sets of Label IDs. Table 38 shows the USA and the EU sets. When changing from one Label ID set to another, all other reader configuration settings, including the host interface type, will be erased and set to the standard factory defaults. Any custom configuration or CAUTION custom defaults will be lost.

Table 38. Label ID Pre-loaded Sets

USA Label ID set EU Label ID set Symbology Default Default Default Default Character ASCII Character ASCII

ABC CODABAR S 530000 S 530000

ANKER PLESSEY o 6F0000 o 6F0000

AZTEC Az 417A00 ! 210000

CHINA SENSIBLE CODE $S 245300 $S 245300

CODABAR % 250000 R 520000

CODE11 CE 434500 b 620000

CODE128 # 230000 T 540000

CODE32 A 410000 X 580000

CODE39 * 2A0000 V 560000

CODE39 CIP Y 590000 Y 590000

CODE39 DANISH PPT $Y 245900 $Y 245900

CODE39 LAPOSTE $a 246100 $a 246100

CODE39 PZN $Z 245A00 $Z 245A00

CODE93 & 260000 U 550000

DATABAR 14 R4 523400 u 750000

DATABAR 14 COMPOSITE R4 523400 c 523400

DATABAR EXPANDED RX 525800 t 740000

288 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Data Editing

USA Label ID set EU Label ID set Symbology Default Default Default Default Character ASCII Character ASCII

DATABAR EXPANDED COMPOSITE RX 525800 d 525800

DATABAR LIMITED RL 524C00 v 760000

DATABAR LIMITED COMPOSITE RL 524C00 i 524C00

DATA MATRIX Dm 446D00 w 770000

EAN128 000000 k 6B0000

EAN128 COMPOSITE 000000 $E 244500

EAN13 F 460000 B 420000

EAN13 P2 F 460000 L 4C0000

EAN13 P5 F 460000 M 4D0000

EAN13 COMPOSITE F 460000 $F 244600

EAN8 FF 464600 A 410000

EAN8 P2 FF 464600 J 4A0000

EAN8 P5 FF 464600 K 4B0000

EAN8 COMPOSITE FF 464600 $G 244700

FOLLET 2OF5 O 4F0000 O 4F0000

GTIN G 470000 $A 244100

GTIN2 G2 473200 $B 244200

GTIN5 G5 473500 $C 244300

I2OF5 i 690000 N 4E0000

IATA INDUSTRIAL 2OF5 IA 494100 & 260000

INDUSTRIAL 2OF5 W 570000 W 570000

ISBN I 490000 @ 400000

ISBT128 CONCAT f 660000 f 660000

ISSN n 6E0000 n 6E0000

MAXICODE MC 4D4300 x 780000

MICRO QR $Q 245100 $Q 245100

MICRO PDF mP 6D5000 8 380000

MSI @ 400000 Z 5A0000

PDF417 P 500000 r 720000

PLESSEY a 610000 a 610000

POSTAL AUSTRALIAN $K 244B00 $K 244B00

POSTAL IMB $V 245600 $V 245600

Product Reference Guide 289 References

USA Label ID set EU Label ID set Symbology Default Default Default Default Character ASCII Character ASCII

POSTAL JAPANESE $R 245200 $R 245200

POSTAL KIX $U 245500 $U 245500

POSTAL PLANET $W 245700 $W 245700

POSTAL PORTUGAL $P 245000 $P 245000

POSTAL POSTNET BB $L 244C00 $L 244C00

POSTAL ROYAL MAIL $M 244D00 $M 244D00

POSTAL SWEDISH $X 245800 $X 245800

POSTNET 1 310000 1 310000

QR CODE QR 515200 y 790000

S25 s 730000 P 500000

TRIOPTIC $T 245400 $T 245400

UPCA A 410000 C 430000

UPCA P2 A 410000 F 460000

UPCA P5 A 410000 G 470000

UPCA COMPOSITE A 410000 $H 244800

UPCE E 450000 D 440000

UPCE P2 E 450000 H 480000

UPCE P5 E 450000 I 490000

UPCE COMPOSITE E 450000 $J 244A00

290 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Data Editing Label ID: Set Individually Per Symbology To configure a Label ID individually for a single symbology:

1. Go to page 56 and scan the ENTER/EXIT bar code.

2. Select Label ID position as either BEFORE (Enable as Prefix) or AFTER (Enable as suffix) by scanning the appropriate bar code in the section "Label ID Control" on page 56. Reference Figure 10 for Label ID posi- tioning options if multiple identification features are enabled.

3. Scan a bar code to select the symbology for which you wish to configure a custom Label ID from the section "Label ID Symbology Selection − 1D Symbologies" on page 57.

4. Determine the desired character(s) (you may choose up to three) which will represent the Label ID for the selected symbology.

5. Turn to the ASCII Chart on the inside back cover of this manual and find the equivalent hex digits associated with your choice of Label ID. For example, if you wish to select an equal sign (=) as a Label ID, the chart indicates its associated hex characters as 3D. Turn to Keypad, starting on page 339 and scan the bar codes representing the hex characters determined. For the example given, the characters ‘3’ and ‘D’ would be scanned. More examples of Label ID settings are provided in Table 39. If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT bar code to exit Label ID entry.

7. Scan the ENTER/EXIT bar code once again to exit Programming Mode. This completes the steps to configure a Label ID for a given symbology. Figure 10. Label ID Position Options

Prefix Label IDAim ID Bar Code Data Label ID Suffix

Product Reference Guide 291 References

Table 39. Label ID Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES Scan the ENTER/EXIT bar 1. (Scanner enters Programming Mode) code

Determine placement of the Label ID characters BEFORE or AFTER with 2. regard to scanned data Enable as Prefix Enable as Suffix Enable as Prefix Enable as Suffix using Label ID Control, starting on page 56 Scan the bar code selecting the symbology type you wish to designate label ID DataBar Interleaved 2 of 3. characters for using Code 39 Code 32 Label Omnidirectional 5 ID Symbology Selection − 1D Symbologies, starting on page 57. Custom Label ID example 4. D B * = C 3 + P H (desired characters): Find hex equivalents from the ASCII Chart(inside back cover), then scan in these digits/characters using the bar codes in the section: Keypad, starting 5. on page 339. If you make 44 42 2A 3D 43 33 2B 50 48 a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. Scan the ENTER/EXIT bar 6. (Scanner exits Label ID entry) code

Scan the ENTER/EXIT bar 7. (Scanner exits Programming Mode) code once again

DB*[bar code [bar code Result: +[bar code data] [bar code data]PH data] data]=C3

292 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Data Editing Character Conversion Character conversion is an eight byte configuration item. The eight bytes are 4 character pairs represented in hexadecimal ASCII values. The first character in the pair is the character that will be converted. The second character in the pair is the character to convert to. If the character to convert in a pair is FF, then no conversion is done. For example, if you have the character conversion configuration item set to the following: 41423132FFFFFFFF The first pair is 4142 or AB (41 hex is an ASCII capital A, 42 hex is an ASCII capital B) and the second pair is 3132 or 12 (31 hex is an ASCII 1, 32 is an ASCII 2). The other two pairs are FFFF and FFFF. With the label, AB12BA21, it would look as follows after the character conversion: BB22BB22. The A characters were converted to B characters and the 1 characters were converted to 2 characters. Nothing is done with the last two character pairs, since they are all FF. To set Character Conversion:

1. Go to page 61 and scan the ENTER/EXIT bar code.

2. Scan the “Configure Character Conversion” bar code.

3. Determine the desired string. Sixteen positions must be determined as in the above example. Next, turn to the ASCII Chart on the inside back cover of this manual and find the equivalent hex digits needed to fulfill the string.

4. Turn to Appendix D, Keypad and scan the bar codes representing the hex characters determined in the previous step.

5. Scan the ENTER/EXIT bar code to exit Programming Mode.

If less than the expected string of 16 characters are selected, scan the ENTER/EXIT bar code twice to accept the selections and exit Program- ming Mode.

Product Reference Guide 293 References Reading Parameters

Good Read LED Duration This feature specifies the amount of time that the Good Read LED remains on following a good read. The good read LED on time can be set within a range of 10 milliseconds to 2,550 milliseconds (0.001 to 2.55 seconds) in 100ms increments. Follow these instructions to set this feature:

1. Determine the desired setting in milliseconds. A setting of 0 means that the good read LED stays on until the next time the trigger is pulled.

2. Divide the desired setting by 10 (setting is in 100ms increments). Pad the result with leading zeroes to yield three digits. For example: 0 = 000, 5 = 000, 20 = 020, etc.

3. Go to page 70 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter Programming Mode.

4. Scan the bar code: SELECT GOOD READ LED DURATION SETTING.

5. Scan the appropriate three digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Key- pad representing the duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character. If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Program- ming Mode.

This completes the procedure. See Table 40 for some examples of how to set this feature.

Table 40. Good Read LED Duration Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES Good Read LED stays on until 1 Desired Setting 20ms 150ms 2550ms (2.55 sec.) next trigger pull (00) Divide by 10 (and pad with 2 000 002 015 255 leading zeroes)

3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

4 Scan SELECT GOOD READ LED DURATION SETTING

Scan Three Characters 5 From Appendix D, ‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘0’ ‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘2’ ‘0’, ‘1’ and ‘5’ ‘2’, ‘5’ and ‘5’ Keypad 6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

294 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Scanning Features Scanning Features

Scan Mode This mode is associated with typical handheld reader operation. Selects the scan operating mode for the reader. The following selections are valid for all models:

Trigger Single: When the trigger is pulled, scanning is activated until one of the following occurs: - Scanning Active Time has elapsed - a label has been read - the trigger is released

Trigger Hold Multiple: When the trigger is pulled, scanning starts and the product scans until the trigger is released or Scanning Active Time has elapsed. Reading a label does not disable scanning. Double Read Timeout prevents undesired multiple reads of the same label while in this mode.

Trigger Pulse Multiple: When the trigger is pulled, continuous scanning is activated until Scanning Active Time has elapsed or the trigger has been released and pulled again. Double Read Timeout prevents undesired multiple reads of the same label while in this mode.

Flashing: The reader flashes on and off regardless of the trigger status. Flash rate is controlled by Flash On Time and Flash Off Time. When Flash is ON the imager reads continuously; when Flash is OFF scanning is deactivated.

Always On: No trigger pull is required to read a bar code. Scanning is contin- ually on. If the trigger is pulled, the reader acts as if it is in Trigger Single Mode. Double Read Timeout prevents undesired multiple reads of the same label while in this mode.

Stand Mode: No trigger pull is required to read a bar code. Scanning is turned on automatically when an item is placed in the reader’s field of view. Double Read Timeout prevents undesired multiple reads while in this mode.

Product Reference Guide 295 References Stand Mode Off Time This feature specifies the amount of time reader illumination stays off after pulling the trigger when in Stand Mode. The configurable range is 01 to 32 by 01 in increments of 500ms (500ms to 16 seconds). Follow these instructions to set this feature:

1. Determine the desired setting.

2. Pad the result with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 2 = 02, 5 = 05, 20 = 20, etc.

3. Go to page 73 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter Programming Mode.

4. Scan the bar code: Set Stand Mode Illuminator Off Time.

5. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Key- pad, that represent the setting which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Program- ming Mode. This completes the procedure. See Table 41 for some examples of how to set this feature.

Table 41. Stand Mode Off Time

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES

1 Desired Setting 500 ms 1 Second 5.5 Seconds 16 Seconds

2 Pad leading zero 01 02 11 32 3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

4 Scan SELECT STAND MODE OFF TIME

Scan Two Characters From 5 ‘0’ and ‘1’ ‘0’ and ‘2’ ‘1’ and ‘1’ ‘3’ and ‘2’ Appendix D, Keypad 6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

296 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Scanning Features Scanning Active Time This setting specifies the amount of time that the reader stays in scan ON state once the state is entered. The range for this setting is from 1 to 255 seconds in 1-second increments. Follow these instructions to set this feature:

1. Determine the desired setting.

2. Pad the result with leading zeroes to yield three digits. For example: 0 = 000, 5 = 005, 20 = 020, etc.

3. Go to page 74 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter Programming Mode.

4. Scan the bar code: SELECT SCANNING ACTIVE TIME SETTING.

5. Scan the appropriate three digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Key- pad, that represent the duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character. If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Program- ming Mode. This completes the procedure. See Table 42 for some examples of how to set this feature.

Table 42. Scanning Active Time Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES 255 Seconds (4.25 1 Desired Setting 1 Second 90 Sec. (1.5 min.) 180 Sec. (3 min.) min.) 2 Pad leading zero(es) 001 090 180 255

3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

4 Scan SELECT SCANNING ACTIVE TIME SETTING Scan Three Characters 5 From Appendix D, ‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘1’ ‘0’, ‘9’ and ‘0’ ‘1’, ‘8’ and ‘0’ ‘2’, ‘5’ and ‘5’ Keypad 6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Product Reference Guide 297 References Aiming Duration Time Specifies the frame of time the aiming pointer remains on after decoding a label, when in trigger single mode. The range for this setting is from 1 to 255 seconds in 1-second increments. Follow these instructions to set this feature:

1. Determine the desired setting.

2. Pad the result with leading zeroes to yield three digits. For example: 0 = 000, 5 = 005, 20 = 020, etc.

3. Go to page 76 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter Programming Mode.

4. Scan the bar code: SELECT AIMING DURATION TIME SETTING.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Program- ming Mode. This completes the procedure. See Table 43 for some examples of how to set this feature.

Table 43. Aiming Duration Time Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES 255 Seconds (4.25 1 Desired Setting 1 Second 90 Sec. (1.5 min.) 180 Sec. (3 min.) min.) 2 Pad leading zero(es) 001 090 180 255

3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

4 Scan SELECT AIMING DURATION TIME SETTING Scan Three Characters 5 From Appendix D, ‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘1’ ‘0’, ‘9’ and ‘0’ ‘1’, ‘8’ and ‘0’ ‘2’, ‘5’ and ‘5’ Keypad 6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

298 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Scanning Features Flash On Time This feature specifies the ON time for the indicator LED while in Flash Mode. The selectable range is 100 to 9,900 milliseconds (0.1 to 9.9 seconds), in 100 millisecond increments. Follow these instructions to set this feature.

1. Determine the desired setting in milliseconds.

2. Divide the desired setting by 100 (setting is in 100ms increments). Pad the result with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 = 05, 20 = 20, etc.

3. Go to page 74 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter Programming Mode.

4. Scan the bar code: SELECT FLASH ON TIME SETTING.

5. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad representing the duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character. If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Program- ming Mode.

This completes the procedure. See Table 44 for examples of how to set this feature.

Table 44. Flash On Time Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES 5200ms (5.2 1 Desired Setting 500ms 1,000ms (1 sec.) 9,900ms (9.9 sec.) sec.) Divide by 100 (and pad 2 with leading zeroes to yield 05 10 52 99 two digits)

3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

4 Scan SELECT FLASH ON TIME SETTING

Scan Two Characters From 5 ‘0’ and ‘5’ ‘1’ and ‘0’ ‘5’ and ‘2’ ‘9’ and ‘9’ Appendix D, Keypad 6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Product Reference Guide 299 References Flash Off Time This feature specifies the OFF time for the indicator LED while in Flash Mode. The selectable range is 100 to 9,900 milliseconds (0.1 to 9.9 seconds), in 100 millisecond increments. Follow these instructions to set this feature.

1. Determine the desired setting in milliseconds.

2. Divide the desired setting by 100 (setting is in 100ms increments). Pad the result with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 0 = 00, 5 = 05, 20 = 20, etc.

3. Go to page 75 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter Programming Mode.

4. Scan the bar code: SELECT FLASH OFF TIME SETTING.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Program- ming Mode. This completes the procedure. See Table 45 for some examples of how to set this feature.

Table 45. Flash Off Time Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES 5200ms (5.2 1 Desired Setting 500ms 1,000ms (1 sec.) 9,900ms (9.9 sec.) sec.) Divide by 100 (and pad 2 with leading zeroes to yield 05 10 52 99 two digits)

3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

4 Scan SELECT FLASH OFF TIME SETTING

Scan Two Characters From 5 ‘0’ and ‘5’ ‘1’ and ‘0’ ‘5’ and ‘2’ ‘9’ and ‘9’ Appendix D, Keypad 6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

300 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Scanning Features Multiple Labels Ordering by Code Symbology This feature Specifies the transmission ordering by symbology type, when Multiple Labels per Frame is enabled.Up to six symbologies can be selected. Zeroes must be added to pad the string to 12 characters if not using all six symbologies. The labels are ordered first as specified in the output mask. Labels present in the volume but not specified will be transmitted as unspecified symbologies in random order as allowed by the reading time sequence. For each label decoded in the volume the reader signals the standard beeper and LED indications. To specify the symbology order:

1. Determine the symbologies and order you want to specify.

2. Use Table 47 on page 302 to find the hex values for up to six symbologies.

3. Go to page 80 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter Programming Mode.

4. Scan the bar code: “SELECT SYMBOLOGIES FOR MULTIPLE LABELS ORDERING”.

5. Scan the appropriate two alphanumeric characters from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad, that represent the desired character/value in step 2 above.

6. Scan zeroes if needed to make a 12-character string.

7. When finished, scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Programming Mode. This completes the procedure. See Table 46 for some examples of how to set this feature.

Table 46. Multiple Labels Ordering by Code Symbology Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES

1 Desired symbology Code 39 Data Matrix Code 128 Aztec

Hex equivalent from 2 ASCII 24 0E 0C 4E Chart 3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

4 Scan SELECT SYMBOLOGIES FOR MULTIPLE LABELS ORDERING Scan Two Characters From 5 ‘2’ and ‘4’ ‘0’ and ‘E’ ‘0’ and ‘C’ ‘4’ and ‘E’ Appendix D, Keypad RESULT 0x240E0C4E0000

6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Table 47 on page 302 shows the hex value associated with each symbology.

Product Reference Guide 301 References

Table 47. Symbology Hex Values

Hex Symbology ID Hex Symbology ID Value Value 00 Don't care 2C GTIN5 01 UPC-A 2D GTIN8 02 UPC-E 2E S2OF5 03 EAN8 2F PDF417 04 EAN13 30 CODE11 05 UPC2 31 IATA 06 UPC5 32 MICRO_PDF 07 C128_ADDON 33 GS1 DataBar_LIM_ID 0A EAN128 34 GS1 DataBar_LIM_COMP 0B C128_PROGRAMMING_LABEL 35 GS1 DataBar_Omnidirectional_COMP 0C CODE128 36 GS1 DataBar_EXP_COMP 0D FNC3_C128_LABEL 37 GENERIC_DATA 0E DATA MATRIX 38 CC_A 0F MAXICODE 39 CC_B 10 QRCODE 3A CC_C 11 Reserved 3B LABELIMAGE 12 Reserved 3C CAPTURE_IMAGE_LABEL 13 CODE49 3D Reserved 14 UPC-E2 3E M2OF5 15 UPC-E5 3F D2OF5 16 Reserved 40 PLESSEY65 17 UPC-A2 42 ISSN 18 UPC-A5 43 ISBT 19 Reserved 44 Reserved 1A EAN82 45 TIMER_EXPIRED_EVENT 1B EAN85 46 FOLLETT_2OF5 1C Reserved 47 Reserved 1D EAN132 48 Reserved 1E EAN135 49 CODE39_CIP 1F EAN138 4A ABC_CODABAR 20 ISBN_ID 4B I2OF5_CIP 21 TWO_LABEL_PAIR 4C C2OF5 22 I2OF5 4D IND2OF5 23 CODABAR 4E AZTEC 24 CODE39 4F UPC-E_COMP 25 PHARMAC39 50 UPC-A_COMP 26 MSI_PLESSEY 51 EAN8_COMP 27 CODE93 52 EAN13_COMP 28 RSS_EXP_ID 53 EAN128_COMP DATA MATRIX_PROGRAMMING_LA- 29 RSS_14_ID 54 BEL 2A GTIN 55 LABEL_ID_MAX 2B GTIN2 FF INVALID_LABEL_TYPE

302 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Motion Features Motion Features

Motionless Timeout This setting specifies the amount of time that the reader takes to assume that it is in a motionless condition. The range for this setting is from 500 msec to 25.5 seconds, in 100 millisecond increments. Follow these instructions to set this feature.

1. Determine the desired setting.

2. Pad the result with leading zeroes to yield three digits. For example: 0.5 = 0005 = 00, 5 = 050, 20 = 200, etc.

3. Go to page 206 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter Programming Mode.

4. Scan the bar code: SELECT MOTIONLESS TIMEOUT SETTING.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Program- ming Mode.

This completes the procedure. See Table 48 for examples of how to set this feature.

Table 48. Motionless Timeout Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES

1 Desired Setting 500ms 1 sec. 10 sec 9,900ms (9.9 sec.)

Divide by 100 (and pad 2 with leading zeroes to yield 005 010 100 250 two digits)

3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

4 Scan SELECT MOTIONLESS TIMEOUT SETTING Scan Two Characters From 5 ‘0’, ‘0’ and ‘5’ ‘0’, ‘1’ and ‘0’ ‘1’, ‘0’, and ‘0’ ‘2’, ‘5’, and ‘0’ Appendix D, Keypad 6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Product Reference Guide 303 References Wireless Features

Automatic Configuration Update When this feature is enabled, the base station and reader will keep their configurations synchronized. If a reader's configuration is altered by reading programming labels, this change is automatically transferred and updated in a linked base station. Likewise, if the base station's configuration is changed using Aladdin or by host commands, then the reader's configuration will automatically be updated if this feature is enabled. RF Address Stamping Source Radio Address Delimiter Character This option specifies the delimiter character to be placed between the label data and radio address when address stamping is enabled.

This feature only applies if "Source Radio Address Transmis- sion" on page 218 is enabled.

Follow these instructions to select the delimiter character:

1. Determine the desired character, then find its hexadecimal equivalent on the ASCII Chart on the inside back cover. A setting of 00 specifies no delimiter character.

2. Go to page 219 and scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter Programming Mode.

3. Scan the bar code: SET SOURCE RADIO ADDRESS DELIMITER CHARAC- TER.

4. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Key- pad, that represent the hexadecimal characters which were determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character. If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

5. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit.

Table 49. Source Radio Address Delimiter Character Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES No delimiter 1 Desired Setting , (comma) - (dash) / (slash) character 2 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

3 Scan SET SOURCE RADIO ADDRESS DELIMiTER CHARACTER Scan Two Characters From 4 ‘0’ and ‘0’ ‘2’ and ‘C’ ‘2’ and ‘D’ ‘2’ AND ‘F’ Appendix D, Keypad 5 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

304 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Wireless Features STAR Radio Protocol Timeout This parameter sets the valid wait time before transmission between the handheld reader and Base Station is considered failed. When setting this parameter, take into consideration the radio traffic (number of readers in the same area). The selectable range for this feature is from 02 to 25 seconds. Follow these instructions to set this feature:

1. Determine the desired setting.

2. Pad the number with leading zeroes to yield two digits. For example: 2 = 02, 5 = 05, 25 = 25, etc

3. Go to page 236 and scanScan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to enter Programming Mode.

4. Scan the barcode: SELECT RADIO PROTOCOL TIMEOUT.

5. Scan the appropriate two digits from the keypad in Appendix D, Key- pad, that represent the duration which was determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character. If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL barcode to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

6. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE barcode to exit Program- ming Mode. This completes the procedure. See Table 50 for some examples of how to set this feature.

Table 50. STAR Radio Protocol Timeout Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES

1 Desired Setting 2 Seconds 5 Seconds 10 Seconds 25 Seconds

2 Pad with leading zero(es) 02 05 10 25 3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

4 Scan SELECTSTAR RADIO PROTOCOL TIMEOUT SETTING

Scan Two Characters From 5 ‘0’ and ‘2’ ‘0’ and ‘5’ ‘1’ and ‘0’ ‘2’ AND ‘5’ Appendix D, Keypad 6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Product Reference Guide 305 References PM9500-Only Features

Changing System Speed in Normal Mode

1. Link the PM9500 with a BC9xxx Base.

2. With the PM9500, read a Compatible Mode programming label on page 240 to set low, intermediate, or high speed.

3. Place the PM9500 into the BC9xxx.

The Reader and Base will now be linked at the new programmed speed.

This feature can also be programmed using Datalogic Aladdin.

1. On the BC9xxx Base, change the Compatible mode parameter to low, intermediate, or high speed through Aladdin.

2. Place an unlinked PM9500 onto the BC9xxx base.

The Reader and base will link with the new programmed speed.

Bluetooth-Only Features

Bluetooth Pin Code This option specifies the 4-character or 16-character pin code to be used for authentication of the Bluetooth link. To set the pin code:

1. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to enter Program- ming Mode, then enable "Bluetooth Security Mode" on page 226.

2. Specify the desired pin code length (4 or 16) by scanning the appropriate bar code in "Select PIN Code Length" on page 226.

3. Determine the desired characters. For example, D254 or STOR12345678135M.

4. Convert the characters to hexadecimal using the ASCII Chart on the inside back cover of this manual.

5. Go to page 226 and Scan the bar code: SET 4 CHAR PIN CODE or SET 16-CHAR PIN CODE.

6. Scan the appropriate alphanumeric characters from the keypad in Appendix D, Keypad, representing the hexadecimal entries determined in the steps above. You will hear a two-beep indication after the last character. If you make a mistake before the last character, scan the CANCEL bar code to abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning.

306 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Wireless Features

7. Scan the ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE bar code to exit Program- ming Mode. Changing the pin code setting will unlink the devices. If the Automatic Configuration Update is set to the default enabled setting, the devices must only be relinked. If the Automatic Configuration Update is set to the disabled setting, the Pin Code setting must also be updated in the Base Station using Aladdin. After the Base Station has been updated, the devices must be relinked.

Table 51. Bluetooth Pin Code Setting Examples

STEP ACTION EXAMPLES

1 Desired Setting D254 STOR12345678135M

Convert the characters 2 44 32 35 34 53 54 4F 52 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 31 33 35 4D to hexadecimal 3 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

4 Scan SET Bluetooth PIN CODE

Scan 8 or 32 Alphanumeric 5 44323534 53544F5231323334353637383133354D Characters From Appendix D, Keypad 6 Scan ENTER/EXIT PROGRAMMING MODE

Product Reference Guide 307 References NOTES

308 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Chapter 5 Message Formatting

Message Formatting is available for PM9500 models only. For this feature to be operational, the scanner must be set to Ignore Host Commands (see page 23).

A message from the Host to the base must follow these rules: • If Address stamping options or address delimiter are enabled on the base, the Host replay must have address field and delimiter too. Other- wise the message will be ignored. Address delimiter is present only when address stamping is enabled. • Address stamping is necessary to correctly route the message to the PM9500, especially when more than one handheld is linked to the same base. Address stamping could be disabled if the system is in point to point configuration. If address stamping is not enabled, the messages are addressed to the first handheld linked to the base. • The maximum character length for messages is 48. • Messages end with “CR” 0x0D ASCII character. The CR character cannot be contained in the middle. • Messages cannot start with '$' or # because these are reserved for Ser- vice mode command • Base station can receive host message only if Host Commands Obey/ Ignore is set to Ignore. • Message could be sent to the handheld in response to a Label when “Transmit mode” require Ack from Host (see transmit mode parameter) or at any time. When messages are sent not in response to a label must start with DC2 0x12 ASCII character and could be sent in any transmit mode setting. • Message could be sent to all handhelds linked to the base by using a Multicast message:  “00 00 00 00 2A AA” • In order to receive a message, handhelds must not be in sleep state. The format of the ACK from Host message (used for transmission mode 02) is: [Scanner_Addr] [Scanner_Addr_delimiter] MESSAGE The format of a generic message From Host to HH is: [Scanner_Addr] [Scanner_Addr_delimiter] DC2 MESSAGE where DC2 is ASCII 0x12 (^R) character. [Items in square brackets are optional.] • If you want to control the Scanner's beeper from the host, you will also probably want to disable the good transmission beep that is emitted when the code is received from the cradle. (See "Wireless Beeper Fea- tures" on page 210). The message field can store plain text and escape sequences. • Escape sequences are interpreted as commands.

Product Reference Guide 309 Message Formatting Cursor Control

ESC [ n A Up n rows, no scroll ESC [ n B Down n rows, no scroll ESC [ n C Right n columns ESC [ n D Left n columns ESC [ G CR ESC [ r ; c H Move to row r, column c (ESC[1;1H is the upper left character position of the display) ESC D Down 1 row, with scroll ESC E CR and cursor down 1 row with scroll ESC M Up 1 row and scroll

• Since CR is used as the message terminator, you must use ESC [ G or ESC E to print a CR. • The cursor row position is not affected by the currently selected font. The display always has 6 rows, so when writing with the large font, actually three rows are written. You will need two ESC E commands to step from one row to the next when using the large font. • The cursor column position is affected by the currently selected font. Therefore, column 6 is 36 pixels from the left border only if you last selected the 6x8 font; otherwise it could be 48 or 72 pixels from the left border.

Font Selection

ESC [ 0 m Normal mode ESC [ 7 m Reverse mode ESC # 4 Large font: subsequent characters are written on the current row and the row below it using the 12x16 font which allows for two rows of eight characters on the display. ESC # 5 Normal font: subsequent characters are written using the 6x8 font, which allows for four rows of sixteen characters on the display. ESC # 7 Medium font: subsequent characters are written using the 8x8 font, which allows for four rows of twelve characters on the display.

Clearing Display

ESC [ 0 K From cursor position to end of line inclusive ESC [ 1 K From beginning of line to cursor position (not inclusive) ESC [ 2 K Entire line ESC [ 0 J From cursor position to end of display inclusive ESC [ 1 J From beginning of display to cursor position (not inclusive) ESC [ 2 J Entire display; moves cursor to upper left corner on display

310 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 LED and Beeper Control

ESC [ 0 q Emit short High tone + short delay ESC [ 1 q Emit short Low tone + short delay ESC [ 2 q Emit long Low tone + short delay ESC [ 3 q Emit good read tone ESC [ 4 q Emit bad tx tone ESC [ 5 q Wait 100 ms ESC [ 6 q Turn on the green LED ESC [ 7 q Turn off the green LED ESC [ 8 q Turn on the red LED ESC [ 9 q Turn off the red LED

The LED control escape sequences are intended to activate the LEDs for short periods of time and can be used in combination with the Beeper. The LED and Beeper will be controlled by the system after the entire command sequence is interpreted. Example: ESC [ 6 q ESC [ 3 q ESC [ 7 q Turns on the green LED, emits a good read tone, and turns off the green LED. ESC [ 6 q ESC [ 5 q ESC [ 7 q Turns on the green LED for 100 ms and then turns off the green LED.

Setting RTC

ESC [ 0 p d d m m y y Set date to day, month, year ESC [ 1 p h h m m Set time to hours, minutes; seconds are automatically set to 00.

Product Reference Guide 311 Message Formatting NOTES

312 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Appendix A Technical Specifications

The tables that follow contain Physical and Performance Characteristics, User Environment and Regulatory information. Table 53 provides Standard Cable Pinouts. Table 52. Technical Specifications

Item Description Physical Characteristics Height: 212 mm Dimensions Length: 110 mm Width: 74 mm Weight (without cable) 330 gr (without cable) Electrical Characteristics

PD9530 models

PD9530/ Voltage & Current PD9530-HPE PD9530-DPM PD9530-HP

Input Voltage 5 VDC +/- 5% 10 to 30 VDC 5 VDC +/- 5% Input Current Operating (typical): 335 mA 135 mA @ 10V 350 mA Operating (max): 475 mA 300 mA @ 10V 480 mA Idle/Standby (typical) 180 mA 60 mA @ 10V 120 mA

PBT9500 and PM9500 models

Battery Type Li-Ion battery pack

a Charge time for full 4 hours with external power supply adapter charge from full dis- Typical 10 hours with Host power (in this case no supply charge adapter is needed)a Operating autonomy 30,000 reads (typical) (continuous reading)

b Cradle consumption and Volt 10-30 VDC; Power <8W ; DC input supply range Max 500 mA when in host/bus powered modeb.

a. Charge Times are much lower when battery is within daily typical operating condition. b. Typical input current measured under factory default configuration.

Product Reference Guide 313 Technical Specifications

Performance Characteristics Light Source LED Roll (Tilt) Tolerance ± 180° Pitch Tolerance ± 40° Skew (Yaw) Tolerance ± 40° Print Contrast  15% minimum reflectance Minimum

Standard Optics Model High Performance (HP)

Max resolution 1D 4 mils 1D 2.5 mil Resolution Max resolution 2D 7.5 mils 2D 4 mil

Depth of Field (Typical)a

Symbology Standard Optics Model High Performance (HP)

4 mils: 6-17 cm 2.5 mils: 2-6 cm Code 39 20 mils: 4-55 cm 20 mils: 3-70 cm 40 mils: 4-85 cm 40 mils: 3-110 cm

EAN 13 13 mils: 4-48 cm 13 13 mils: 3-60 cm

PDF-417 10 mils: 2-25 cm 10 mils: 2-30 cm

7.5 mils: 7-14 cm 4mil: 2-6 cm DataMatrix 10 mils: 4-18 cm 10mil: 2-20 cm

Standard Range: High Density: 1D Minimum Resolution = 4 mil 1D Minimum Resolution  PDF-417 Minimum Resolution  = 2.5 mil Minimum  = 5 mil PDF-417 Minimum Resolution  Element Width Data Matrix Minimum Resolution  = 4 mil = 7 mil Data Matrix Minimum Resolution = 5 mil

a13 mils DOF based on EAN. All other 1D codes are Code 39. All labels grade A, 300 lux ambient light, 20°C, label inclination 10°

314 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Decode Capability

Item Description

GS1 Databar linear codes, UPC/EAN (A,E,13,8), UPC/EAN with P2/ P5 Addons, UPC/EAN Coupons, ISBN, Code128, EAN128, ISBT128, 1D Bar Codes Code39, Code39 Full ASCII, Code39 CIP, Code 32, Codabar, Inter- leaved 2 of 5, IATA, Industrial 2 of 5, Standard 2 of 5, Code11, MSI, Plessey, Code 93, Follet 2/5 DataMatrix, MaxiCode and QR Codes(QR, Micro QR and Multiple QR codes), Aztec - Postal codes including Australian Post, China Post, Japanese Post, KIX Post, Korea Post, Planet Code, Postnet, Royal Mail Code (RM45CC), IMB 2D / Stacked Codes - stacked codes including EAN/JAN Composites; GS1 Databar Composites, GS1 Databar Expanded Stacked; GS1 DataBar Stacked; GS1 DataBar Stacked Omnidirectional; MacroPDF; Micro PDF417; PDF417; UPC A/E Composites, French CIP13, Grid Matrix (Chinese) code

High Performance Model: Same as above.

Interfaces  RS-232, Keyboard Wedge (IBM AT-PS/2), USB (USB-KBD, USB- Supporteda COM).

a. See "Interface Selection" on page 14 for a listing of available interface sets by model type.

Item Description User Environment Operating  -4° to 122° F (-20° - +50° C ) Temperature Storage Temperature -40° to 158° F (-40° to 70° C)

Humidity 0 to 95% non-condensing

Drop Specifications Scanner withstands >50 times 6.5' (2 m) drops to concrete Ambient Light  100,000 Lux Immunity Contaminants Spray/ IP65 Rain/Dust/Particulates ESD Level 20 KV Beeper/Speaker >= 80 dB @ 10 cm

Product Reference Guide 315 Technical Specifications

Item Description Regulatory PD9530 (Corded PBT9500 PM9500 Models) UL 60950, CSA C22.2 UL 60950, CSA C22.2 UL 60950, CSA C22.2 Electrical Safety No. 60950, IEC 60950 No. 60950, IEC 60950 No. 60950, IEC 60950 433 MHz model North America (FCC) : Part 15 Class B; Can- Europe - CE, Russia – North America (FCC) : ada ( IC) : ICES-003 Gost; Australia – Canada ( IC); Russia ( Class B; Russia ( Gost); Ctick;  Gost); European European Union EMC China – SRRC; Singa- Union R&TTE Direc- Directive; pore – IDA EMI/RFI tive; VCCI-Japan; Korean 910 MHz model Japan; Korean KCC; KCC; Taiwan EMC Taiwan; Australia; USA/Canada – FCC/ (BSMI); Australia Mexico IC; Mexico – NOM + (ACMA); Mexico (NOM Cofetel Nyce)

IEC Class 2 IEC Class 2 IEC Class 2 Radiation 1 mW Avg., Radiation 1 mW Avg., Radiation 1 mW Avg., Emitted wavelength Emitted wavelength Emitted wavelength Laser Safety 650 nm, 12ms pulse, 650 nm, 12ms pulse, 650 nm, 12ms pulse, Beam Divergence 8.4 Beam Divergence 8.4 Beam Divergence 8.4 deg x 8.1 deg (“plus” deg x 8.1 deg (“plus” deg x 8.1 deg (“plus” pattern) pattern) pattern) Complies with FDA performance standards for laser products except for deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007.

Radio Features

PBT9500

Frequency working 2400 to 2483.5 MHz center

Range (in open air) up to 100 m

Max number of devices per base 7 station

316 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Imager Labeling

PM9500

Frequency working 433 MHz 910 MHz center 19.2 kb/s 36.8 kb/s Programmable 115.2 kb/s Speed 500 kb/s (default) 500 kb/s (default) 100 m (at 500 kb/s) 140 m (at 36.8 kb/s,  Typical Range (in 50 m (at 500 kb/s) frequency hopping) open air) 100 m (at 19.2 kb/s) 50 m (at 36.8 kb/s,  fixed channel) 100 m (at 500 kb/s) Typical Range (in 140 m (at 36.8 kb/s,  40 m (at 500 kb/s) open air)  frequency hopping) 80 m (at 19.2 kb/s) DPM models 50 m (at 36.8 kb/s,  fixed channel) Max number of devices per base 16 station

Imager Labeling

Sample labels are shown for illustrative purposes only. Please view the labels  on your product for actual details, as they may vary from those depicted. Scanner Regulatory Label

Product Reference Guide 317 Technical Specifications Standard Cable Pinouts

The data below provides standard pinout information for the interface cable. Figure 11. Standard Cable Pinouts: Handheld

The signal descriptions in Table 53 apply to the connector on the reader and are for reference only.

Table 53. Standard Cable Pinouts

Keyboard Pin RS-232 USB Wedge

1 RTS (out) 2 D+ CLKIN (KBD side) 3 D- DATAIN (KBD side) 4 GND GND GND 5 RX 6 TX 7 VCC VCC VCC 8 CLKOUT (PC side) DATAOUT (PC 9 side) 10 CTS (in)

318 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 LED and Beeper Indications LED and Beeper Indications

The reader’s beeper sounds and its LED illuminates to indicate various functions or errors on the reader. An optional “Green Spot” also performs useful functions. The tables below list these indications. One exception to the behaviors listed in the tables is that the reader’s functions are programmable, and may or may not be turned on. For example, certain indications such as the power-up beep can be disabled using programming bar code labels. Table 54. LED and Beeper Indications

INDICATION DESCRIPTION LED BEEPER

Reader beeps four Power-up The reader is in the pro- times at highest fre- Beep cess of powering-up. quency and volume upon power-up. LED behavior for The reader will beep this indication is once at current fre- A label has been suc- Good Read configurable via quency, volume, tonal cessfully scanned by Beep the feature “Good setting and duration the reader. Read: When to upon a successful label Indicate” scan. Upon successful read of Green Spota a label, the software flashes turns the green spot on N/A N/A momentarily for the time specified by the configured value. Blue light flashes 2 Image Cap- When ready to capture times when updat- N/A ture image ing

a. Except when in sleep mode or when a Good Read LED Duration other than 00 is selected

Table 55. Programming Mode Indications

Programming Mode - The following indications ONLY occur when the reader is in Pro- gramming Mode.

INDICATION DESCRIPTION LED BEEPER

Reader sounds Label Program- A valid programming LED blinks con- four low frequency ming Mode Entry label has been scanned. tinuously beeps. Reader sounds Label Program- three times at low- ming Mode Rejec- A label has been rejected. N/A est frequency & tion of Label current volume. In cases where multiple Label Program- labels must be scanned Reader sounds one ming Mode Accep- to program one feature, short beep at high- N/A tance of Partial this indication acknowl- est frequency & Label edges each portion as it is current volume. successfully scanned.

Product Reference Guide 319 Technical Specifications

Programming Mode Indications (continued)

INDICATION DESCRIPTION LED BEEPER

Reader sounds one Configuration option(s) Label Program- high frequency have been successfully ming Mode Accep- beep and 4 low fre- programmed via labels N/A tance of quency beeps fol- and the reader has exited Programming lowed by reset Programming Mode. beeps. Reader sounds two Label Program- Cancel label has been times at low fre- ming Mode Cancel N/A scanned. quency and current Item Entry volume.

Error Codes

Upon startup, if the reader sounds a long tone, this means the reader has not passed its automatic Selftest and has entered FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) isolation mode. If the reader is reset, the sequence will be repeated. Press and release the trigger to hear the FRU indication code. The following table describes the LED flashes/beep codes associated with an error found.

NUMBER OF LED FLASHES/ Error CORRECTIVE ACTION BEEPS

1 Configuration

2 Interface PCB Contact Helpdesk for 6 Digital PCB assistance 11 Imager

Base Station Indications (Cordless Models ONLY)

Base Station Button Indicators

BUTTON PUSH RED GREEN CORDLESS EVENT INDICATOR(**) INDICATOR(**)

force device connection Slow blink Push at power-up Off (Aladdin) Fast blink < 5 sec Paging Off Fast blink 5 to 10 sec Unlink (Only Bluetooth) Off Slow blink

320 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Appendix B Sample Bar Codes

The sample bar codes in this appendix are typical representations for their symbology types. 1D Bar Codes

UPC-A

EAN-13

978033029095

Code 39

Code 128

Interleaved 2 of 5

Product Reference Guide 321 Sample Bar Codes Sample Bar Codes (continued)

Code 32

Codabar

13579

Code 93

Code 11

123456789

322 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 GS1 DataBar™ (RSS)

GS1 DataBar™ variants must be enabled to read the bar codes below (see "GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional" on page 151).

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Stacked

10293847560192837465019283746029478450366523 GS1 DataBar™ Expanded

1234890hjio9900mnb GS1 DataBar™ Limited

08672345650916

GS1 DataBar™-14

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Truncated

55432198673467

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Stacked

90876523412674

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Stacked

78123465709811

Product Reference Guide 323 Sample Bar Codes 2D Bar Codes

Aztec Datamatrix

China Sensible Code MaxiCode

Test Message

PDF 417 Micro PDF 417

ABCabc BV17453

QR Code Micro QR Code

123456 35900G9

UCC Composite

324 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Appendix C Standard Defaults

The most common configuration settings are listed in the “Default” column of the table below. Page references are also provided for feature descriptions and programming bar codes for each parameter. A column has also been provided for recording of your preferred default settings for these same configurable features.

Table 56. Standard Defaults

Page Parameter Default Your Setting Number

GLOBAL INTERFACE FEATURES

Host Commands — Obey/Ignore Obey 23

USB Suspend Mode Disable 23

RS-232 ONLY

Baud Rate 115200 26

Data Bits 8 Data Bits 27

Stop Bits 1 Stop Bit 27

Parity None 28

Handshaking Control RTS 29

RS-232/USB-Com

Intercharacter Delay No Delay 31

Beep On ASCII BEL Disable 31

Beep On Not on File Enable 32

ACK NAK Options Disable 32

ACK Character ‘ACK’ 33

NAK Character ‘NAK’ 33

ACK NAK Timeout Value 200 ms 34

ACK NAK Retry Count 3 Retries 34

ACK NAK Error Handling Ignore Errors Detected 35

Product Reference Guide 325 Standard Defaults

Page Parameter Default Your Setting Number

Indicate Transmission Failure Enable 35

Disable Character ‘D’ 36

Enable Character ‘E’ 36

KEYBOARD WEDGE

Country Mode U.S. Keyboard 38

Send Control Characters 00 41

Wedge Quiet Interval 100 ms 42

Intercode Delay No Delay 42

Caps Lock State Caps Lock OFF 43

Numlock NumLock Key Unchanged 43

USB Keyboard Speed 1 ms 44

USB Keyboard Numeric Keypad Standard Keys 45

USB-OEM

USB-OEM Device Usage Handheld 48

Ignore Scanner Configu- Interface Options 48 ration Host Commands

Data Format

No Global Prefix Global Prefix/Suffix (Header/Terminator) 50 Global Suffix = 0x0D (CR)

Global AIM ID Disable 51

Set AIM ID Individually for GS1-128 Enable 54

Label ID: Pre-Loaded Sets EU Set 55

Individually Set Label ID Disable 56

Case Conversion Disable 61

Character Conversion No Char Conversion 61

READING PARAMETERS

Double Read Timeout 0.6 Second 63

Power On Alert Power-up Beep 66

Good Read: When to Indicate After Decode 66

Good Read Beep Type Mono 67

Good Read Beep Frequency High 67

Good Read Beep Length 80 ms 68

Good Read Beep Volume High 69

326 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Standard Defaults

Page Parameter Default Your Setting Number

Good Read LED Duration 300 ms 70 Scanning Features

Scan Mode Trigger Single 71

Stand Mode Indication Disable 72

Pick Mode Disable 72

Stand Mode Sensitivity Medium 73

Stand Mode Illumination Off Time 2 Seconds 73

Scanning Active Time 5 Seconds 74

Stand Illumination Control OFF 74

10 = Flash is ON for 1 Flash On Time 75 Second

06 = Flash is OFF for Flash Off Time 75 600ms

Aiming Pointer Enable 76

Aiming Off Aiming Duration Timer 76 After Decoding

Green Spot Duration 300 ms 77

Partial Label Reading Control Enable 77

Decode Negative Image Disable 78 Multiple Label Reading

Multiple Labels per Frame Disable 79 Multiple Labels Ordering by Code Random Order 80 Symbology

Multiple Labels Ordering by Code Length Disable 80

CODE SELECTION - 1D SYMBOLOGIES

Code EAN/UPC

Enable only UPCA Coupon Control 83 coupon decoding UPC-A

UPC-A Enable/Disable Enable 84

UPC-A Check Character Transmission Send 84

Expand UPC-A to EAN-13 Don’t Expand 85 UPC-A Number System Character Transmit 85 Transmission

2D Component Not UPC-A 2D Component 86 Required

Product Reference Guide 327 Standard Defaults

Page Parameter Default Your Setting Number

UPC-E

UPC-E Enable/Disable Enable 86

UPC-E Check Character Transmission Send 87

2D Component Not UPC-E 2D Component 87 Required

Expand UPC-E to EAN-13 Don’t Expand 88

Expand UPC-E to UPC-A Don’t Expand 88 UPC-E Number System Character Transmit 89 Transmission GTIN

GTIN Formatting Disable 89 EAN 13 (Jan 13)

EAN 13 Enable/Disable Enable 90

EAN 13 Check Character Transmission Send 90

EAN-13 Flag 1 Character Transmit 91

EAN-13 ISBN Conversion Disable 91

2D Component Not EAN-13 2D Component 92 Required ISSN

ISSN Enable/Disable Disable 92 EAN 8

EAN 8 Enable/Disable Enable 93

EAN 8 Check Character Transmission Send 93

Expand EAN 8 to EAN 13 Disable 94

2D Component Not EAN 8 2D Component 94 Required UPC/EAN Global Settings

UPC/EAN Price Weight Check Disable 95

UPC/EAN Quiet Zones Two Modules 96 Add-Ons

Optional Add-ons Disable P2, P5 and P8 97

Optional Add-On Timer 70 ms 98

Optional GS1-128 Add-On Timer Disable 100 Code 39

Code 39 Enable/Disable Enable 103

328 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Standard Defaults

Page Parameter Default Your Setting Number

Code 39 Check Character Calculation Don’t Calculate 103

Code 39 Check Character Transmission Send 104 Code 39 Start/Stop Character Don’t Transmit 105 Transmission

Code 39 Full ASCII Disable 105

Small Quiet Zones on two Code 39 Quiet Zones 106 sides

Code 39 Length Control Variable 106

Code 39 Set Length 1 2 107

Code 39 Set Length 2 50 108 Trioptic Code

Trioptic Code Enable/Disable Disable 109 Code 32 (Italian Pharmaceutical Code)

Code 32 Enable/Disable Disable 109

Code 32 Check Character Transmission Don’t Send 110 Code 32 Start/Stop Character Don’t Transmit 110 Transmission Code 39 CIP (French Pharmaceutical Code)

Code 39 CIP Enable/Disable Disable 111 Special Codes

Code 39 Danish PPT Enable/Disable Disable 111

Code 39 LaPoste Enable/Disable Disable 112

Code 39 PZN Enable/Disable Disable 112 Code 128

Code 128 Enable/Disable Enable 113

Expand Code 128 to Code 39 Don’t Expand 113

Code 128 Check Character Transmission Don’t Send 114 Code 128 Function Character Don’t Send 114 Transmission Code 128 Sub-Code Exchange Disable 115 Transmission

Small Quiet Zones on two Code 128 Quiet Zones 115 sides

Code 128 Length Control Variable 116

Code 128 Set Length 1 1 117

Product Reference Guide 329 Standard Defaults

Page Parameter Default Your Setting Number

Code 128 Set Length 2 80 118 GS1-128

Transmit in Code 128 GS1-128 Enable 119 Data Format

GS1-128 2D Component Disable 119 ISBT 128

ISBT 128 Concatenation Disable 120

ISBT 128 Force Concatenation Disable 120

ISBT 128 Concatenation Mode Static 121

ISBT 128 Dynamic Concatenation Timeout 200 msec 122 Interleaved 2 of 5

I 2 of 5 Enable/Disable Disable 123

I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation Disable 124

I 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission Send 125

I 2 of 5 Length Control Variable 125

I 2 of 5 Set Length 1 6 126

I 2 of 5 Set Length 2 50 127 Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR

Interleaved 2 of 5 CIP HR Enable/Disable Disable 128 Follett 2 of 5

Follett 2 of 5 Enable/Disable Disable 128 Standard 2 of 5

Standard 2 of 5 Enable/Disable Disable 129 Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Disable 129 Calculation Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Send 130 Transmission

Standard 2 of 5 Length Control Variable 130

Standard 2 of 5 Set Length 1 8 131

Standard 2 of 5 Set Length 2 50 132 Industrial 2 of 5

Industrial 2 of 5 Enable/Disable Disable 133 Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Disable 133 Calculation

330 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Standard Defaults

Page Parameter Default Your Setting Number

Industrial 2 of 5 Check Character Enable 134 Transmission

Industrial 2 of 5 Length Control Variable 134

Industrial 2 of 5 Set Length 1 1 135

Industrial 2 of 5 Set Length 2 50 136 Code IATA

IATA Enable/Disable Disable 137

IATA Check Character Transmission Enable 137 Codabar

Codabar Enable/Disable Disable 138

Codabar Check Character Calculation Don’t Calculate 138

Codabar Check Character Transmission Send 139 Codabar Start/Stop Character Transmit 139 Transmission

Codabar Start/Stop Character Set abcd/abcd 140

Codabar Start/Stop Character Match Don’t Require Match 140

Codabar Quiet Zones Quiet Zones on two sides 141

Codabar Length Control Variable 141

Codabar Set Length 1 3 142

Codabar Set Length 2 50 143

ABC Codabar Disable 144 ABC Codabar

ABC Codabar Enable/Disable Disable 144

ABC Codabar Concatenation Mode Static 144 ABC Codabar Dynamic Concatenation 200 msec 145 Timeout

ABC Codabar Force Concatenation Disable 146 Code 11

Code 11 Enable/Disable Disable 147

Code 11 Check Character Calculation Check C and K 147

Code 11 Check Character Transmission Send 148

Code 11 Length Control Variable 148

Code 11 Set Length 1 4 149

Code 11 Set Length 2 50 150

Product Reference Guide 331 Standard Defaults

Page Parameter Default Your Setting Number

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional Enable/ Disable 151 Disable GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional GS1-128 Disable 151 Emulation

GS1 DataBar™ Omnidirectional 2D 2D component not 152 Component required GS1 DataBar™ Expanded

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Enable/Disable Disable 152 GS1 DataBar™ Expanded GS1-128 Disable 153 Emulation

2D component not GS1 DataBar™ Expanded 2D Component 153 required

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Length Control Variable 154

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Set Length 1 1 155

GS1 DataBar™ Expanded Set Length 2 74 156 GS1 DataBar™ Limited

GS1 DataBar™ Limited Enable/Disable Disable 157 GS1 DataBar™ Limited GS1-128 Disable 157 Emulation

2D component not GS1 DataBar™ Limited 2D Component 158 required Code 93

Code 93 Enable/Disable Disable 158

Code 93 Check Character Calculation Enable Check C and K 159

Code 93 Check Character Transmission Enable 159

Code 93 Length Control Variable 160

Code 93 Set Length 1 1 161

Code 93 Set Length 2 50 162

Small Quiet Zones on two Code 93 Quiet Zones 163 sides MSI

MSI Enable/Disable Disable 163

MSI Check Character Calculation Enable Mod10 164

MSI Check Character Transmission Enable 164

MSI Length Control Variable 166

332 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Standard Defaults

Page Parameter Default Your Setting Number

MSI Set Length 1 1 166

MSI Set Length 2 50 167 Plessey

Plessey Enable/Disable Disable 168

Enable Plessey std. check Plessey Check Character Calculation 168 char. verification

Plessey Check Character Transmission Enable 169

Plessey Length Control Variable 169

Plessey Set Length 1 1 170

Plessey Set Length 2 50 171

CODE SELECTION - 2D SYMBOLOGIES

2D Maximum Decoding Time 350msec 174

2D Structured Append Disable 175

2D Normal/Inverse Symbol Control Both 175

Aztec Code Enable / Disable Disable 176

Aztec Code Length Control Enable 176

Aztec Code Length Control Variable 176

Aztec Code Set Length 1 1 177

China Sensible Code Enable / Disable Disable 179

China Sensible Code Length Control Variable 179

China Sensible Code Set Length 1 1 180

China Sensible Code Set Length 2 7,827 181

Data Matrix Enable / Disable Enable 182

Both Square and Data Matrix Square/Rectangular Style 182 Rectangular style

Data Matrix DPM Decoding Safety 1 183

Data Matrix Length Control Variable 184

Data Matrix Set Length 1 1 184

Data Matrix Set Length 2 3,116 185

Maxicode Enable / Disable Disable 186

Maxicode Primary Message Transmission Disable 186

Maxicode Length Control Variable 187

Maxicode Set Length 1 1 187

Maxicode Set Length 2 0145 188

Product Reference Guide 333 Standard Defaults

Page Parameter Default Your Setting Number

PDF417 Enable / Disable Enable 189

PDF417 Length Control Variable 189

PDF417 Set Length 1 1 190

PDF417 Set Length 2 2,710 191

Micro PDF417 Enable / Disable Disable 192

Micro PDF417 Code 128 GS1-128 Micro PDF AIM ID and 192 Emulation label type

Micro PDF417 Length Control Variable 193

Micro PDF417 Set Length 1 1 193

Micro PDF417 Set Length 2 0366 194

QR Code Enable / Disable Enable 195

QR Code Length Control Variable 195

QR Code Set Length 1 1 196

QR Code Set Length 2 7,089 197

Micro QR Code Enable/Disable Disable 197

Micro QR Code Length Control Variable 198

Micro QR Code Set Length 1 0001 198

Micro QR Code Set Length 2 0035 199

UCC Composite Enable / Disable Disable 200

UCC Optional Composite Timer Timer Disabled 201

Postal Code Selection Disable all Postal codes 202

Postnet BB Control Disable 203

Motion Features

Motion Aiming Control Enable 205

Motion Sensitivity Medium 206

Motionless Timeout 2 seconds 206

Wireless Features

Good Transmission Beep Enable 210

Beep Frequency Low 210

Beep Duration 80 msec 211

Beep Volume High 212

Disconnect Beep Enable 212

Docking Beep Enable 213

334 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Standard Defaults

Page Parameter Default Your Setting Number

Leash Alarm Disable 213

Automatic Configuration Update Enable 215

Copy Configuration to Scanner N/A 215

Copy Configuration to Base Station N/A 215

Batch Mode Disable 216

Send Batch N/A 216

Erase Batch Memory N/A 217

RF Batch Mode Transmit Delay No Delay 217

Direct Radio Autolink Unlink Label Required 218

Source Radio Address Transmission Do not include 218

Source Radio Address Delimiter Character No Delimiter Character 219

Current Date YYMMDD 220

Current Time HHMMSS 220

Date Tx Format YYYY-MM-DD (ISO 8601) 221

Time Tx Format hh:mm:ss (ISO 8601) 221

Date-Time Separator Disable 222

Date-Time Transmission Order Disable 223

Powerdown Timeout 30 minutes 224

Features for PBT9500 Models Only

Bluetooth Security Mode Disable 226

Bluetooth PIN Code N/A 226

Select PIN Code Length 4-Character 226

Set PIN Code 1234 227

Reconnect Attempt Interval 1 minute 228

Bluetooth HID Variable PIN Code Static 229

Bluetooth HID Alt Mode Off 230

Bluetooth HID Send Unknown ASCII Char Disable 230

Bluetooth Max Client 2 231

[SERIAL_NUMBER_ Bluetooth Friendly Name 232 SCANNER]

Bluetooth Reconnect Attempt Mode Enable 232

Power Class Power Class 1 233

HID Country Mode US 233

Product Reference Guide 335 Standard Defaults

Page Parameter Default Your Setting Number

Features for PM9500 Models Only

STAR Radio Protocol Timeout 02 236

STAR Radio Transmit Mode Ack from cradle 237

Frequency Agility Use default fixed channel 238

Compatibility with PM8500

Compatible Mode System Speed High Speed 240

Base Address Stamping Do Not Include 242

Base Address Delimiter Character No Delimiter Character 242 RS-485 Master Header/Terminator ( N/A 243 Prefix/Suffix)

RS-485 Cradle Address N/A 243

RS-485 Slave Minimum Address N/A 244

RS-485 Slave Maximum Address N/A 244

RS-485 Network Working Mode Disable 245

RS-485 Network Warning Message Not Transmitted 246

RS-485 Transmission Warning Message Not Transmitted 246

RS-485 Network Baud Rate 9600 246

Display and Keyboard Features

Display Operating Mode Local echo mode 247

Display Off Timeout 8 second delay 248

Backlight Enable Disable 248

Display Contrast 249

Font Size Small 249

Enable/disable buttons All 4 keys enabled 250

Function Keys Action Arrow Keys Mode (4-key models only) 251 Select mode

Arrow Up String (4-key models only) N/A 251

Arrow Down String (4-key models only) N/A 252

Configure Actions for F1 No Actions Configured 254

Configure Actions for F2 No Actions Configured 254 Configure Actions for F3 (16-key models No Actions Configured 255 only) Configure Actions for F4 (16-key models No Actions Configured 255 only)

336 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Standard Defaults

Page Parameter Default Your Setting Number

Configure Actions for Shift (16-key No Actions Configured 256 models only)

Define Strings N/A 257

Set String ID N/A 258

Set String Header No Header 258

Set String Terminator No Terminator 259

Display Time Stamping Mode Applied to both 260

Mode Selection Set Normal Mode 261

Transmit code with Quantity Field 261 default qty (1)

Quantity/Code Send Mode Qty precedes Code 262

Quantity/Code Separator No separator 262

Interkey Timeout 1.0 seconds 263

Append Code Overwrite always 264

Echo Full Keypad echo 265

Keypress Sound Enable 265

SHIFT Enable/Disable Enable SHIFT function 266

Lower Case Disable Lower Case 267

Barcode/Key Different Data Format Disable 269

Product Reference Guide 337 Standard Defaults Restore Factory Configuration If you want to restore the Factory Configuration for your imager, scan either the Restore USA Factory Configuration bar code or the Restore EU Factory Configuration bar code below. Both labels restore the scanner configuration to the factory settings, including the interface type. Scanning either of the “Restore Factory Configuration” commands below will result in the loss of any custom configuration settings for your device. Go to "Restore Custom Defaults" on page 18 if CAUTION you want to restore your custom configuration settings.

The USA label restores Label IDs to those historically used in the USA. The EU label restores Label IDs to those historically used in Europe. The Label ID sets for USA and EU are shown in Label ID: Pre-loaded Sets, starting on page 288 of this manual.

$P,AE,P(CR)

Restore USA Factory Configuration

$P,Ae,P(CR)

Restore EU Factory Configuration

338 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Appendix D Keypad

Use the bar codes in this appendix to enter numbers as you would select digits/characters from a keypad.

1 0

2 3

5 4

6 7

8 9

Product Reference Guide 339 Keypad

Keypad (continued)

A B

C D

E F

Make a mistake? Scan the CANCEL bar code to ~ abort and not save the entry string. You can then start again at the beginning. CANCEL

340 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Appendix E Scancode Tables

Control Character Emulation

Control character emulation selects from different scancode tables as listed in this appendix. Each of the control character sets below are detailed by interface type in the tables. These apply to Wedge and USB Keyboard platforms.

Control Character 00 : Characters from 00 to 0x1F are sent as control character Ctrl+Keys, special keys are located from 0x80 to 0xA1.

Control Character 01 : Characters from 00 to 0x1F are sent as control character Ctrl+Capital Key, special keys are located from 0x80 to 0xA1.

Control Character 02 : Special keys are located from 00 to 0x1F and characters from 0x80 to 0xFE are intended as an extended ASCII table (Microsoft Windows Codepage 1252 — see page 348).

Single Press and Release Keys In the following tables, Ar↓ means Alt right pressed and Ar↑ means Alt right released and so on. Definitions for other keys are Al (Alt left ), Cr (Control Right ) Cl (Control Left ) Sh (shift). This method can be used for combining Alt, Control or Shift with other keys. Example: Consider a Control character set to 00. If AltRight+A is required before sending a label to the host, it could be done by setting three Prefix keys in this way: 0x99 0x41 0x9A.

Product Reference Guide 341 Interface Type PC AT PS/2, USB-Keyboard or USB-Keyboard for APPLE

Table 57. Scancode Set When Control Character is 00 or 01

x0 x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 X6 x7 x8 x9 xA xB xC xD xE xF NULL SOH STX ETX EOT ENQ ACK BEL HT LF VT FF CR SO SI 0x BS C+@ C(S)+A C(S)+B C(S)+C C(S)+D C(S)+E C(S)+F C(S)+G TAB C(S)+J C(S)+K C(S)+L Enter C(S)+N C(S)+O DLE DC1 DC2 DC3 DC4 NAK SYN ETB CAN EM SUB ESC FS GS RS US 1x C(S)+P C(S)+Q C(S)+R C(S)+S C(S)+T C(S)+U C(S)+V C(S)+W C(S)+X C(S)+Y C(S)+Z Esc C+\ C+] C+^ C(S)+_ 2x SP ! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / 3x 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ? 4x @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O 5x P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _ 6x ` a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o 7x p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~ Del Ent 8x € Sh↓ Sh↑ Ins F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 (keyp) 9x F12 Home End Pg Up Pg Dwn     Ar↓ Ar↑ Al↓ Al↑ Cl ↓ Cl ↑ Cr ↓ Ax Cr ↑ ‘ ƒ „ … † ‡ ˆ ‰ Š ‹ Ś ‹ Œ Bx ° ± ² ³ ´ µ ¶ · ¸ ¹ º » ¼ ½ ¾ ¿ Cx À Á Â Ã Ä Å Æ Ç È É Ê Ë Ì Í Î Ï Dx Ð Ò Ó Ô Õ Ö × Ø Ù Ú Û Ü Ý Þ ß Ex à á â ã ä å æ ç è é ê ë ì í î ï Fx ð ñ ò ó ô õ ö ÷ ø ù ú û ü ý þ ÿ

Extended characters (sky blue) are sent through dedicated keys (when available in the selected country mode) or by using an Alt Mode sequence.

342 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Interface Type PC AT PS/2, USB-Keyboardor USB-Keyboard for APPLE (continued)

Table 58. Scancode Set WhenCo ntrol Character is 02

x0 x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 X6 x7 x8 x9 xA xB xC xD xE xF Enter 0x Ar↓ Ar↑ Al↓ Al ↑ Cl ↓ Cl ↑ Cr ↓ Cr ↑ BS Tab  S+ Tab Enter Ins Pg Up Keypd 1x Pg Dwn Home    F6 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 ESC F7 F8 F9 F10 2x Space ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . / 3x 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ? 4x @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O 5x P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _ 6x ` a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o 7x p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~ Del 8x € ‘ ƒ „ … † ‡ ˆ ‰ Š ‹ Ś ‹ Œ 9x ‘ ’ “ ” • – — ˜ ™ š › œ ž Ÿ Ax NBSP ¡ ¢ £ ¤ ¥ ¦ § ¨ © ª « ¬ - ® ¯ Bx ° ± ² ³ ´ µ ¶ · ¸ ¹ º » ¼ ½ ¾ ¿ Cx À Á Â Ã Ä Å Æ Ç È É Ê Ë Ì Í Î Ï Dx Ð Ò Ó Ô Õ Ö × Ø Ù Ú Û Ü Ý Þ ß Ex à á â ã ä å æ ç è é ê ë ì í î ï Fx ð ñ ò ó ô õ ö ÷ ø ù ú û ü ý þ ÿ

Product Reference Guide 343 Interface Type PC AT PS/2 Alt Mode or USB-Keyboard Alt Mode

Table 59. Scancode Set When Control Character is 00 or 01

x0 x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 X6 x7 x8 x9 xA xB xC xD xE Xf HT CR 0x Alt+000 Alt+001 Alt+002 Alt+003 Alt+004 Alt+005 Alt+006 Alt+007 BS Alt+010 Alt+011 Alt+012 Alt+014 Alt+015 TAB Enter ESC 1x Alt+016 Alt+017 Alt+018 Alt+019 Alt+020 Alt+021 Alt+022 Alt+023 Alt+024 Alt+025 Alt+026 Alt+028 Alt+029 Alt+030 Alt+031 Esc 2x A+032 A+033 A+034 A+035 A+036 A+037 A+038 A+039 A+040 A+041 A+042 A+043 A+044 A+045 A+046 A+047 3x A+048 A+049 A+050 A+051 A+052 A+053 A+054 A+055 A+056 A+057 A+058 A+059 A+060 A+061 A+062 A+063 4x A+064 A+065 A+066 A+067 A+068 A+069 A+070 A+071 A+072 A+073 A+074 A+075 A+076 A+077 A+078 A+079 5x A+080 A+081 A+082 A+083 A+084 A+085 A+086 A+087 A+088 A+089 A+090 A+091 A+092 A+093 A+094 A+095 6x A+096 A+097 A+098 A+099 A+100 A+101 A+102 A+103 A+104 A+105 A+106 A+107 A+108 A+109 A+110 A+111 7x A+112 A+113 A+114 A+115 A+116 A+117 A+118 A+119 A+120 A+121 A+122 A+123 A+124 A+125 A+126 A+127 Ent 8x € Sh↓ Sh↑ Ins F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 (keyp) 9x F12 Home End Pg Up Pg Dwn     Ar↓ Ar↑ Al↓ Al ↑ Cl ↓ Cl ↑ Cr ↓ Ax Cr ↑ A+0161 A+0162 A+0163 A+0164 A+0165 A+0166 A+0167 A+0168 A+0169 A+0170 A+0171 A+0172 A+0173 A+0174 A+0175 Bx A+0176 A+0177 A+0178 A+0179 A+0180 A+0181 A+0182 A+0183 A+0184 A+0185 A+0186 A+0187 A+0188 A+0189 A+0190 A+0191 Cx A+0192 A+0193 A+0194 A+0195 A+0196 A+0197 A+0198 A+0199 A+0200 A+0201 A+0202 A+0203 A+0204 A+0205 A+0206 A+0207 Dx A+0208 A+0209 A+0210 A+0211 A+0212 A+0213 A+0214 A+0215 A+0216 A+0217 A+0218 A+0219 A+0220 A+0221 A+0222 A+0223 Ex A+0224 A+0225 A+0226 A+0227 A+0228 A+0229 A+0230 A+0231 A+0232 A+0233 A+0234 A+0235 A+0236 A+0237 A+0238 A+0239 Fx A+0240 A+0241 A+0242 A+0243 A+0244 A+0245 A+0246 A+0247 A+0248 A+0249 A+0250 A+0251 A+052 A+0253 A+0254 A+0255

344 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Interface Type PC AT PS/2 Alt Mode USB-Keyboard or Alt Mode (continued)

Table 60. Scancode Set WhenCo ntrol Character is 02

x0 x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 X6 x7 x8 x9 xA xB xC xD xE xF Enter 0x Ar↓ Ar↑ Al↓ Al ↑ Cl ↓ Cl ↑ Cr ↓ Cr ↑ BS Tab  S+ Tab Enter Ins Pg Up Keypd 1x Pg Dwn Home    F6 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 ESC F7 F8 F9 F10 2x A+032 A+033 A+034 A+035 A+036 A+037 A+038 A+039 A+040 A+041 A+042 A+043 A+044 A+045 A+046 A+047 3x A+048 A+049 A+050 A+051 A+052 A+053 A+054 A+055 A+056 A+057 A+058 A+059 A+060 A+061 A+062 A+063 4x A+064 A+065 A+066 A+067 A+068 A+069 A+070 A+071 A+072 A+073 A+074 A+075 A+076 A+077 A+078 A+079 5x A+080 A+081 A+082 A+083 A+084 A+085 A+086 A+087 A+088 A+089 A+090 A+091 A+092 A+093 A+094 A+095 6x A+096 A+097 A+098 A+099 A+100 A+101 A+102 A+103 A+104 A+105 A+106 A+107 A+108 A+109 A+110 A+111 7x A+112 A+113 A+114 A+115 A+116 A+117 A+118 A+119 A+120 A+121 A+122 A+123 A+124 A+125 A+126 A+127 8x A+0128 A+0129 A+0130 A+0131 A+0132 A+0133 A+0134 A+0135 A+0136 A+0137 A+0138 A+0139 A+0140 A+0141 A+0142 A+0143 9x A+0144 A+0145 A+0146 A+0147 A+0148 A+0149 A+0150 A+0151 A+0152 A+0153 A+0154 A+0155 A+0156 A+0157 A+0158 A+0159 Ax A+0160 A+0161 A+0162 A+0163 A+0164 A+0165 A+0166 A+0167 A+0168 A+0169 A+0170 A+0171 A+0172 A+0173 A+0174 A+0175 Bx A+0176 A+0177 A+0178 A+0179 A+0180 A+0181 A+0182 A+0183 A+0184 A+0185 A+0186 A+0187 A+0188 A+0189 A+0190 A+0191 Cx A+0192 A+0193 A+0194 A+0195 A+0196 A+0197 A+0198 A+0199 A+0200 A+0201 A+0202 A+0203 A+0204 A+0205 A+0206 A+0207 Dx A+0208 A+0209 A+0210 A+0211 A+0212 A+0213 A+0214 A+0215 A+0216 A+0217 A+0218 A+0219 A+0220 A+0221 A+0222 A+0223 Ex A+0224 A+0225 A+0226 A+0227 A+0228 A+0229 A+0230 A+0231 A+0232 A+0233 A+0234 A+0235 A+0236 A+0237 A+0238 A+0239 Fx A+0240 A+0241 A+0242 A+0243 A+0244 A+0245 A+0246 A+0247 A+0248 A+0249 A+0250 A+0251 A+052 A+0253 A+0254 A+0255

Product Reference Guide 345 Digital Interface

Table 61. Scancode Set When Control Character is 00 or 01

X0 x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 x6 x7 x8 x9 xA xB xC xD xE xF NULL SOH STX ETX EOT ENQ ACK BEL HT LF VT FF CR SO SI 0x BS C+@ C(S)+A C(S)+B C(S)+C C+D C(S)+E C(S)+F C(S)+G TAB C(S)+J C(S)+K C(S)+L Enter C(S)+N C(S)+O DLE DC1 DC2 DC3 DC4 NAK SYN ETB CAN EM SUB ESC FS GS RS US 1x C(S)+P C(S)+Q C(S)+R C(S)+S C(S)+T C(S)+U C(S)+V C(S)+W C(S)+X C(S)+Y C(S)+Z Esc C(S)+\ C+] C(S)+^ C(S)+_ 2x Space ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . / 3x 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ? 4x @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O 5x P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _ 6x ` a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o 7x p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~ Del Ent 8x Sh↓ Sh↑ Ins F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 (keyp) 9x F12 F13 F14 F15 F16     Cl ↓ Cl ↑

Table 62. Scancode Set WhenCo ntrol Character is 02 X0 x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 x6 x7 x8 x9 xA xB xC xD xE xF Enter 0x Cl ↓ Cl ↑ BS Tab à S+ Tab Enter Ins Keypd 1x    F6 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 ESC F7 F8 F9 F10 2x Space ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . / 3x 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ? 4x @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O 5x P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _ 6x ` a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o 7x p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~ Del

346 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 IBM31xx 102-key

Table 63. Scancode Set When Control Character is 00 or 01

X0 x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 x6 x7 x8 x9 xA xB xC xD xE xF NULL SOH STX ETX EOT ENQ ACK BEL HT LF VT FF CR SO SI 0x BS C+@ C(S)+A C(S)+B C(S)+C C+D C(S)+E C(S)+F C(S)+G TAB C(S)+J C(S)+K C(S)+L Enter C(S)+N C(S)+O DLE DC1 DC2 DC3 DC4 NAK SYN ETB CAN EM SUB ESC FS GS RS US 1x C(S)+P C(S)+Q C(S)+R C(S)+S C(S)+T C(S)+U C(S)+V C(S)+W C(S)+X C(S)+Y C(S)+Z Esc C(S)+\ C+] C(S)+^ C(S)+_ 2x Space ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . / 3x 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ? 4x @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O 5x P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _ 6x ‘ a B c d e f g h i j k l m n o 7x p q R s t u v w x y z { | } Del Ent 8x Sh↓ Sh↑ Ins F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 (keyp) Enter 9x F12 Enter Reset Insert Delete Field - Field + Printl Ar↓ Ar↑ Al↓ Al ↑ Cl ↓ Cl ↑ Cr ↓ paddle Ax Cr ↑

Table 64. Scancode Set WhenCo ntrol Character is 02

X0 x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 x6 x7 x8 x9 xA xB xC xD xE xF Enter 0x Ar↓ Ar↑ Al↓ Al ↑ Cl ↓ Cl ↑ Cr ↓ Cr ↑ BS Tab  S+ Tab Enter Ins Pg Up Keypd 1x Pg Dwn Home    F6 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 ESC F7 F8 F9 F10 2x Space ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . / 3x 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ? 4x @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O 5x P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _ 6x ‘ a B c d e f g h i j k l m n o 7x p q R s t u v w x y z { | } Del

Product Reference Guide 347 IBM XT

Table 65. Scancode Set When Control Character is 00 or 01

X0 x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 x6 x7 x8 x9 xA xB xC xD xE xF NULL SOH STX ETX EOT ENQ ACK BEL BS HT LF VT FF CR SO SI 0x C+@ C(S)+A C(S)+B C(S)+C C+D C(S)+E C(S)+F C(S)+G C(S)+H TAB C(S)+J C(S)+K C(S)+L Enter C(S)+N C(S)+O DLE DC1 DC2 DC3 DC4 NAK SYN ETB CAN EM SUB ESC FS GS RS US 1x C(S)+P C(S)+Q C(S)+R C(S)+S C(S)+T C(S)+U C(S)+V C(S)+W C(S)+X C(S)+Y C(S)+Z Esc C(S)+\ C+] C(S)+^ C(S)+_ 2x Space ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . / 3x 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ? 4x @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O 5x P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _ 6x ‘ a B c d e f g h i j k l m n o 7x p q R s t u v w x y z { | } Del Ent 8x Sh↓ Sh↑ Ins F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 (keyp) 9x F12 Home End Pg Up Pg Dwn     Ar↓ Ar↑ Al↓ Al ↑ Cl ↓ Cl ↑ Cr ↓ Ax Cr ↑

Table 66. Scancode Set when Control Character 02

X0 x1 x2 x3 x4 x5 x6 x7 x8 x9 xA xB xC xD xE xF Enter 0x Ar↓ Ar↑ Al↓ Al ↑ Cl ↓ Cl ↑ Cr ↓ Cr ↑ BS Tab  S+ Tab Enter Ins Pg Up Keypd 1x Pg Dwn Home    F6 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 ESC F7 F8 F9 F10 2x Space ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . / 3x 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ? 4x @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O 5x P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _ 6x ‘ a B c d e f g h i j k l m n o 7x p q R s t u v w x y z { | } Del

348 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 Microsoft Windows Codepage 1252 Microsoft Windows Codepage 1252

Windows-1252 is a character encoding of the Latin alphabet, used by default in the legacy components of Microsoft Windows in English and some other Western languages.

Product Reference Guide 349 Scancode Tables NOTES

350 PowerScan™ PD9530/PBT9500/PM9500 ASCII Chart

ASCII Hex ASCII Hex ASCII Hex ASCII Hex Char. No. Char. No. Char. No. Char. No.

NUL 00 SP 20 @ 40 ‘ 60 SOH 01 ! 21 A 41 a 61 STX 02 “ 22 B 42 b 62 ETX 03 # 23 C 43 c 63 EOT 04 $ 24 D 44 d 64 ENQ 05 % 25 E 45 e 65 ACK 06 & 26 F 46 f 66 BEL 07 ’ 27 G 47 g 67 BS 08 ( 28 H 48 h 68 HT 09 ) 29 I 49 i 69 LF 0A * 2A J 4A j 6A VT 0B + 2B K 4B k 6B FF 0C , 2C L 4C l 6C CR 0D - 2D M 4D m 6D SO 0E . 2E N 4E n 6E SI 0F / 2F O 4F o 6F DLE 10 0 30 P 50 p 70 DC1 11 1 31 Q 51 q 71 DC2 12 2 32 R 52 r 72 DC3 13 3 33 S 53 s 73 DC4 14 4 34 T 54 t 74 NAK 15 5 35 U 55 u 75 SYN 16 6 36 V 56 v 76 ETB 17 7 37 W 57 w 77 CAN 18 8 38 X 58 x 78 EM 19 9 39 Y 59 y 79 SUB 1A : 3A Z 5A z 7A ESC 1B ; 3B [ 5B { 7B FS 1C < 3C \ 5C | 7C GS 1D = 3D ] 5D } 7D RS 1E > 3E ^ 5E ~ 7E US 1F ? 3F _ 5F DEL 7F www.datalogic.com

Datalogic ADC, Inc. 959 Terry Street | Eugene |OR 97402 | USA Telephone: (1) 541-683-5700 | Fax: (1) 541-345-7140

820053614 (Rev G) Feb. 2016